FCC ID: AZ492FT4896 Mobile 2-way Radio

 

6881095C99-G.book Page 1 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM Product Safety and RF Energy Exposure Booklet for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations ATTENTION!

BEFORE USING THIS RADIO, READ THIS BOOKLET WHICH CONTAINS IMPORTANT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE USAGE AND RF ENERGY AWARENESS AND CONTROL INFORMATION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH RF ENERGY EXPOSURE LIMITS IN APPLICABLE NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS. The information provided in this document supersedes the general safety information contained in user guides published prior to January 2008. 2005 2009 by Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. 10/09 1301 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.

*NNTN7851B*

NNTN7851B

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-G English 6881095C99-G.book Page 2 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information, and Operational Instructions for FCC Occupational Use Requirements NOTICE: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves to send and receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited to, sunlight and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other forms of electromagnetic energy, which when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop standards for safe exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins of protection. All Motorola two-way radios are designed, manufactured, and tested to ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. English 2 6881095C99-G.book Page 3 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM Please refer to the following Web sites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Federal Communication Commission Regulations The FCC rules require manufacturers to comply with the FCC RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed in the U.S. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your Motorola two-way radio has a RF exposure product label. Also, your Motorola user manual, or separate safety booklet, includes information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure and to satisfy compliance requirements. Compliance with RF Exposure Standard Your Motorola two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and international standards and guidelines (listed below) regarding human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/controlled RF exposure environment at duty factors of up to 50% talk-50% listen and is authorized by the FCC for occupational use. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with the FCC exposure guidelines, your radio antenna radiates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting (during talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 3 English 6881095C99-G.book Page 4 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM Your Motorola two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47CFR part 2 sub-part J American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95. 1-1992 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-1999 Edition Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1-2005 Edition International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998 Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard, 2003 ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution 256 (April 11, 2001) additional requirements for SMR, cellular, and PCS product certification RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions To control exposure to yourself and others and to ensure compliance with the RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following procedures. Guidelines:

User awareness instructions should accompany device when transferred to other users. DO NOT use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. English 4 6881095C99-G.book Page 5 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM Instructions:

Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50% of the time. To transmit

(talk), push the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button or, for radios equipped with VOX, speak into the microphone. The red LED will illuminate when the radio is transmitting. To receive calls, release the PTT button, or, for radios equipped with VOX, stop talking. The red LED will extinguish when the radio stops transmitting. Transmitting 50% of the time, or less, is important because this radio generates measurable RF energy exposure only when transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards compliance). Transmit only when people outside the vehicle are at least the recommended minimum lateral distance away, as shown in Table 1, from the body of a vehicle with a properly installed antenna. This separation distance will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed

(according to installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the RF exposure requirements in the standards listed above. NOTE: Table 1 below lists the recommended lateral distance for people in an uncontrolled environment from the body of a vehicle with an approved, properly installed transmitting antenna (i.e., monopoles over a ground plane, or dipoles) at several different ranges of rated radio power for mobile radios installed in a vehicle. Table 1. Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Mobile Two-Way Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Note) Less than 7 watts 7 to 14 watts 15 to 39 watts 40 to 110 watts Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body 8 inches (20 centimeters) 1 foot (30 centimeters) 2 feet (60 centimeters) 3 feet (90 centimeters) 5 English 6881095C99-G.book Page 6 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM When a mobile radio is used in conjunction with another co-located transmitter such as a Vehicular Repeater, it is the vehicle operators responsibility to take appropriate steps to keep bystanders at the required separation distance from the vehicle to ensure compliance with the FCC's RF energy exposure limits for the general population. See the co-located transmitters user manual for more details. NOTE: If you are not sure of the rated power of your radio, contact your Motorola representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you can not determine the rated power out, then assure 3-feet separation from the body of the vehicle. The maximum power shown on the FCC Grant may be higher than the rated power allowing for production variation. Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines These mobile antenna installation guidelines are limited to metal body motor vehicles or vehicles with appropriate ground planes. Antennas should be installed in the center area of the roof or the trunk lid taking into account exposure conditions of backseat passengers and according to the specific instructions and restrictions in the Radio Installation Manual along with the requirements of the antenna supplier. Trunk lid installations are limited to vehicles with clearly defined flat trunk lids, and in some cases, to specific radio models and antennas. See the Radio Installation Manual for specific information on how and where to install specific types of approved antennas to facilitate recommended operating distances to all potentially exposed persons. Use only the Motorola-approved, supplied antenna or a Motorola-

approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. English 6 6881095C99-G.book Page 7 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM Approved Accessories This radio has been tested and meets RF Safety Standards when used with the Motorola accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and accessories, refer to the user manual for your radio model. Additional Information For additional information on exposure requirements or other training information, visit http://www.motorola.com/rfhealth. Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed on page 4:

The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. For additional installation information, see the guidelines for minimum separation distances provided above in the RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions section of this document. 7 English 6881095C99-G.book Page 8 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. It may be necessary to conduct compatibility testing to determine if any electronic equipment used in or around vehicles or near fixed site antenna is sensitive to external RF energy or if any procedures need to be followed to eliminate or mitigate the potential for interaction between the radio transmitter and the equipment or device. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles To avoid possible interaction between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission controls, the radio should be installed only by an experienced installer and the following precautions should be used when installing the radio:

1. Refer to the manufacturers instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2. Before installing the radio, determine the location of the electronic control modules and their harnesses in the vehicle. 3. Route all radio wiring, including the antenna transmission line, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated wiring. English 8 6881095C99-G.book Page 9 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM Driver Safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of radios in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using your radio while driving, please:

Give full attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Operational Warnings W A R N I N G For Vehicles with an Air Bag DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. 9 English 6881095C99-G.book Page 10 Tuesday, October 27, 2009 1:25 PM W A R N I N G Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. For radios installed in vehicles fueled by liquefied petroleum gas, refer to the (U.S.) National Fire Protection Association standard, NFPA 58, for storage, handling, and/or container information. For a copy of the LP-gas standard, NFPA 58, contact the National Fire Protection Association, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. English 10

 

 

O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 1 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM APX 7500 User Guide O9 Control Head 68007024014-B O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 2 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 3 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM m ASTRO APX 7500 Series Digital Mobile Radios Quick Reference Card Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance

C a u t i o n Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio. ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio (Motorola Publication part number 6881095C99) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. Radio On/Off Press the Power On/Off button to toggle the power on or off. Adjusting Volume Turn the Volume knob clockwise to increase volume or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Selecting a Zone 1 > or < to Zone. Press the Menu Select button directly under the Zone. 2 U or D button until the desired zone is displayed. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to confirm the displayed zone. 4 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone channel. 2010 by Motorola, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 06/10 1301 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. 1 2 3 4 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Selecting a Channel 1 > or < to Channel. Press the Menu Select button directly under the Channel. 2 U or D button until the desired channel is displayed. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to confirm the selected channel. 4 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone channel. Radio Controls 1 Turn the Mode Knob to scroll to the required channel. 2 Press PTT button to transmit on the selected zone channel. 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Siren Control Buttons Programmable Buttons (Top) Response Selector Directional Buttons Orange Button Public Address Button Keypad Data Feature Button Mode Knob 4-Way Navigation Button Home Button Satus Icons Programmable Buttons

(Bottom) Menu Select Buttons Volume Knob Display Backlight Control Buttons LED Indicators Power On/Off Button Receiving and Transmitting 1 Take the microphone off hook. 2 Select zone/channel. 3 Listen for a transmission. OR Turn the Volume Knob. OR

> or < to Monitor then press the Menu Select button directly below Monitor and listen for activity. 4 Adjust volume, if necessary. 5 Press the PTT button to transmit; release to receive.

*PMLN5711A*

PMLN5711A English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 4 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending an Emergency Alarm 1 Press the Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display shows EMERGENCY and the current zone or channel. 2 A dispatcher acknowledgment ACK RECEIVED display follows. AND, Trunking Only:

A high-pitched tone indicates that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 3 Press and hold the emergency button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) 1 Press the Emergency button. 1 A tone sounds and the display shows EMERGENCY and the current zone or channel. OR A talk prohibited tone sounds when the selected channel does not support emergency. 2 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT to end the transmission. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm 1 Press the Emergency button to activate the silent alarm feature. 2 The display does not change; the LED does not light up, and there is no tone. English If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. Display Status Icons F O M K HOR . i Receiving a call or data Transmitting a call or data Received an Individual Call. The more stripes, the stronger the signal strength for the current site

(trunking only). Direct radio to radio communication or connected through a repeater. On = Direct Off = Repeater This channel is being monitored. Voice muting the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel. On = Enabled Off = Disabled L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scanning a scan list. Blinking dot = Detects activity on the Priority-One Channel during scan. Steady dot = Detects activity on the Priority-Two Channel during scan. k m l G n o Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady = View mode. Blinking = Program mode. The vote scan feature is enabled. On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. location signal available. On = Location feature enabled, and Off = Location feature disabled. Blinking = Location feature enabled, but location signal unavailable. the radio. with the radio. On = User is currently associated with Off = User is currently not associated Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data activity is present. Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Alternates between red and blue when the lightbar is on.

< or > to Menu Entry.

- directly below Menu Entry to select. U or D to scroll through sub-list.

- directly below Menu Entry to select. H to exit. Menu Navigation O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page i Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc. Address: 1301 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: APX 7500 conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. D e c l a r a t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y i English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page ii Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. y t i m r o f n o C f o n o i t a r a l c e D ii English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page iii Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Contents This User Guide contains all the information you need to use the APX 7500 Series Digital Mobile Radios. Declaration of Conformity . i Important Safety Information . ix Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance . ix Software Version . ix Computer Software Copyrights . x Documentation Copyrights . x Disclaimer . x Getting Started . 1 How to Use This Guide . 1 Notations Used in This Manual . 1 Additional Performance Enhancement . 2 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) . 2 CrossTalk Prevention . 2 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) . 2 SecureNet . 2 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You . 3 Preparing Your Radio for Use . 3 Turning On the Radio . 4 Validating Compatibility During Power Up . 5 Adjusting the Volume . 5 Adjusting the Display Backlight . 6 C o n t e n t s Identifying Radio Controls . 6 Radio Parts and Controls . 7 Programmable Features . 8 Assignable Radio Functions . 8 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . 10 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . 10 Using the Menu Select Buttons . 10 Using the Navigation Buttons . 11 Home Button . 11 Data Feature Button . 11 4-Way Navigation Button . 11 Mode Knob . 11 Using the Top Programmable Buttons . 11 iii English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page iv Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Keypad . 12 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . 12 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . 13 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . 14 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . 15 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . 16 Identifying Status Indicators . 16 Status Icons . 17 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . 19 Status Icons . 19 TMS Menu Options . 20 Call Type Icons . 21 LED Indicator . 22 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . 23 Alert Tones . 24 Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts . 27 General Radio Operation . 28 Selecting a Zone . 28 Selecting a Radio Channel . 29 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . 30 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call . 30 s t n e t n o C iv English Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking Only) . 31 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) . 32 Making a Radio Call . 33 Making a Talkgroup Call . 33 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) . 33 Making an Enhanced Private Call (Trunking Only) .34 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) . 35 Repeater or Direct Operation . 36 Monitoring Features . 36 Monitoring a Channel . 36 Conventional Mode Operation . 37 Advanced Features . 38 Advanced Call Features . 38 Calling a Phone Not in the List . 38 Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) . 39 Receiving a Selective Call . 39 Making a Selective Call . 39 Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) . 40 Selecting a Talkgroup . 40 Sending a Status Call . 41 O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page v Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only) . 41 Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) . 42 Classifying Regrouped Radios . 42 Contacts . 43 Making a Private Call from Contacts . 43 Adding a New Contact Entry . 44 Deleting a Contact Entry . 46 Adding a Contact to a Call List . 46 Removing a Contact from a Call List . 47 Editing a Contact in a Call List . 47 Editing an Entry Alias . 47 Editing as Entry ID . 48 Editing a Call Type . 49 Viewing Details of a Contact . 49 Scan Lists . 50 Viewing a Scan List . 50 Editing the Scan List . 50 Changing the Scan List Status . 51 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status . 52 Scan . 52 Turning Scan On or Off . 52 Transmitting While the Scan is On . 53 Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan . 53 Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan . 53 C o n t e n t s Making a Dynamic Priority Change (Conventional Scan Only) . 53 Deleting a Nuisance Channel . 54 Restoring a Nuisance Channel . 54 Hang Up (HUB) . 55 Call Alert Paging . 55 Receiving a Call Alert Page . 56 Sending a Call Alert Page . 56 Emergency Operation . 58 Sending an Emergency Alarm . 58 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) . 59 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call . 59 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm . 60 Using the Emergency Keep-Alive Feature . 61 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . 62 Viewing the Channel which supports ARS Mode . 62 Accessing the User Login Feature . 62 Logging In as a User . 63 Logging Out . 64 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . 64 Accessing the TMS Features . 65 Composing and Sending a New Text Message . 65 Sending a Quick Text Message . 67 Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features . 68 v English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page vi Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message . 68 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message . 69 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message . 69 Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message 69 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message . 69 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message . 70 Managing Text Messages . 70 Receiving a Text Message . 70 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox . 71 Replying to a Received Text Message . 71 Accessing the Drafts Folder . 72 Managing Sent Text Messages . 73 Viewing a Sent Text Message . 73 Sending a Sent Text Message . 74 Deleting a Text Message . 74 Deleting All Text Messages . 75 Secure Operations . 76 Enabling the Secure Transmission . 76 Managing Encryption . 76 Loading the Encryption Key(s) . 76 Using the Multikey Feature . 77 Selecting an Encryption Key . 77 Selecting a Keyset . 78 Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys . 78 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO s t n e t n o C vi English Conventional Only) . 79 MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page . 79 Hear Clear . 80 Security . 80 Using the Radio Lock . 80 Unlocking Your Radio . 80 Changing Your Password . 81 Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature

(Secure Radios Only) . 82 The Global Positioning System (GPS) . 82 Understanding the GPS Feature . 82 Enhancing GPS Performance . 83 Using the Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) .83 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature . 84 Saving a Waypoint . 85 Viewing a Saved Waypoint . 86 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint . 86 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint . 88 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint . 89 Deleting All Saved Waypoints . 89 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint . 90 Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode . 90 Trunking System Controls . 91 Using the Failsoft System . 91 O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page vii Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Going Out of Range . 91 SmartZone . 92 Using the Site Trunking Feature . 92 Locking and Unlocking a Site . 92 Viewing and Changing a Site . 93 Viewing the Current Site . 93 Changing the Current Site . 93 Using the Trunked Announcement . 93 Initiating an Announcement . 94 Ignition Switch Options . 94 Blank . 94 Tx Inhibit . 94 PTT Tx Inhibit . 94 Required . 95 Soft Power Off . 95 Ignition Only Power Up . 95 Emergency Power Up . 95 Auto Power Off Timer . 96 Utilities . 96 Viewing the Recent Calls List . 96 Selecting the Power Level . 97 Selecting a Radio Profile . 97 Toggling the Day or Night Display Mode . 98 Selecting the Stealth Mode . 98 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off . 98 Turning Voice Mute On or Off . 99 C o n t e n t s Using the Time-Out Timer . 99 Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features . 100 Analog Options . 100 Digital Options . 100 Using the PL Defeat Feature . 100 Using the Digital PTT ID Feature . 101 Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) . 101 Using Quick-Key Override . 102 Accessing the General Radio Information . 102 Accessing the Radio Information . 102 Viewing the IP Information . 103 Viewing the Control Assignments . 104 Using the Directional Buttons . 104 Using the Siren Control Keyapad . 105 Using the Manual Siren Button for Manual Siren Tone . 105 Using the Manual Siren Button as Siren Types Selector . 106 Using the Public Address Button . 106 Using the Response Selector . 106 Using External Alarms (Horn and Lights) . 107 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights . 107 Using Permanent Horn and Lights . 108 Changing the Selected Alarms . 108 Using the Gun Lock . 108 vii English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page viii Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Unlocking Single Gun Lock . 108 Unlocking All Gun Locks . 109 Using the Voice Announcement . 109 Using the Action Consolidation Mode . 111 Activating the Action Consolidation Activities . 111 Deactivating the Action Consolidation Activities . 112 Helpful Tips . 113 Caring for Your Radio . 113 Accessories . 114 Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range . 115 Special Channel Assignments . 115 Emergency Channel . 115 Non-Commercial Call Channel . 115 Operating Frequency Requirements . 116 Glossary . 118 Commercial Warranty . 123 s t n e t n o C viii English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page ix Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Important Safety Information Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio. C a u t i o n

ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio

(Motorola Publication part number 6881095C98) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorola.com/governmentandenterprise Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R05.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 102 to determine your radio's software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. I m p o r t a n t S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n ix English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page x Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. s t h g i r y p o C e r a w t f o S r e t u p m o C x English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 1 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Getting Started Take a moment to review the following:

How to Use This Guide . page 1 Notations Used in This Manual . page 1 Additional Performance Enhancement . page 2 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You. page 3 How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX 7500 O9 Control Head Mobile Radios. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of WARNING, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed.

W A R N I N G

C a u t i o n An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Note:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which is essential to emphasize. 1 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 2 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM The following special notations identify certain items:

Example Home button or H Phone

Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the radios display. This means Press the right side of the 4-way Navigation button. Additional Performance Enhancement The following are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality and efficiency of APX radios. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR)

DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication e.g. failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV & D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 2 English CrossTalk Prevention

This feature prevents crosstalk scenario from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the Trident Transmitting SSI clock rate in the radio to be varied from the Receiving Frequency. This subsequently reduced the possibilities of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID)

EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV & D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet

SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC OTAR feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 3 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator, if the radio is to be operated in extremely cold temperatures (less than -20 C), for the correct radio settings to ensure proper operation. You can also consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio preprogrammed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been preprogrammed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Preparing Your Radio for Use Assemble your radio by following these steps:

Turning On the Radio. page 4 Validating Compatibility During Power Up . page 5 Adjusting the Volume . page 5 Adjusting the Display Backlight . page 6 P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i 3 English If Ch mismatch appears, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. To turn off the radio, press the Power On/Off Button after the LEDs light up. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 4 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Turning On the Radio Press the Power On/Off Button briefly to power on the radio. Power On/Off button After a short time, the red, yellow and green LEDs light up. The display then shows Zone and channel text, and menu items display on the screen. The backlight will turn on to the last selected dim level. Note: Pressing the Power On/Off Button before the LED lights up will be ignored. If Fail ##/## appears in the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If Error ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Helpful Tips on page 99 for more information. i e s U r o f o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 4 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 5 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Validating Compatibility During Power Up Adjusting the Volume To increase the volume, rotate the Volume Knob clockwise. To decrease the volume, rotate the Volume Knob counterclockwise. Volume Knob The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power up. Follow the procedure below when your radio runs this task. Procedure:

1 The display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. 2 The display shows Update done Please reset upon completion. OR The display shows Update failed Please reset when it fails to update. 3 Press the Power On/Off Button to reset. The radio runs the usual power up operation if the software updates are complete. OR The radio runs the Maintenance Mode if the updates are not complete and repeat step 1. Note:

If SW incomplete appears, use Flashport Recovery Tool to update the control heads before you power on the radio again. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i 5 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 6 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Adjusting the Display Backlight You can change the intensity of the radios display backlight as needed to suite the environment conditions. Note:

The backlight setting also affects the Menu Select buttons, the Menu Navigation buttons and the keypad backlighting accordingly. Procedure:

Press and hold + on the n button to increase brightness. Release the button to stop. OR Press and hold the - on the n button to decrease brightness. Release the button to stop. Identifying Radio Controls Take a moment to review the following:

Radio Parts and Controls. page 7 Programmable Features . page 8 Assignable Radio Functions. page 8 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . page 10 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions. page 10 Using the Menu Select Buttons . page 10 Using the Navigation Buttons. page 11 Using the Keypad . page 12 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . page 12 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . page 13 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . page 14 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . page 15 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . page 16 l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 6 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 7 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Radio Parts and Controls 1 2 3 4 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Siren Control Buttons Programmable Buttons (Top) Response Selector Directional Buttons Orange Button Public Address Button Keypad Data Feature Button Mode Knob 4-Way Navigation Button Home Button Satus Icons Programmable Buttons (Bottom) Menu Select Buttons Volume Knob Display Backlight Control Buttons LED Indicators Power On/Off Button I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 7 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 8 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to a control that is preprogrammed means that the control must be programmed by a dealer or qualified radio technician using the radio's programming software, in order to assign a feature to that control. The programmable buttons can be programmed as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press:

Press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the preprogrammed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions

Action Consolidation Allows the radio to execute a specific sequence of actions that combine audio, visual and location data. E.g. Mode Change, Lightbar, Siren, Direct Status and Location Data. Bluetooth Toggles bluetooth feature off or on. Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 8 English Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Gun Lock Triggers the Gun Lock(s) to open. Information Displays the information of the radio. Internet Protocol Address Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address, device name and status of the radio. Location Determines the current location (latitude, longitude, time and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location. Or, turns the GPS functionality on or off for all location. Message Enters the current message list. Monitor (Conventional Only) Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Multiple Private Line (Conventional Only) Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel, from the scan list. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 9 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM One Touch 1 4 Launches a specific feature with one single button-press. You can setup as much as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Private Call (Trunking Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Radio Profiles Allows for easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Recent Calls Allows for easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher that you require a new encryption key. Relay Pattern Activates different lightbar patterns for different applications. Repeater Access Button (RAB) (Conventional Only) Allows to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Request-To-Talk (Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want to send a voice call. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Scan List Programming Selects the scan list for editing. Secure/Clear Toggles secure operation on or off. Selective Call (Conventional Only) Calls an assigned radio. Siren Turns different Siren Tones on or off. Site Display (Trunking Only) Displays the current site ID and RSSI value. Site Lock/Unlock Locks onto a specific site. Site Search (Trunking Only) Performs site search for AMSS

(Automatic Multiple Site Select) or SmartZone operation. Status Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct (Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup (Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Automatically registers with the server. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 9 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 10 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

Horns/Lights Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Keypad Lock Toggles the keypad lock on or off. Voice Announcement Audibly indicates the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. Voice Mute Toggles voice mute on or off. Volume Set Tone Sets the volume set tone. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:

A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons such as Top Function Programmable Button or Bottom Function Programmable Button. OR Use the Menu Select Button ( - ). Using the Menu Select Buttons

The Menu Select Buttons access the menu entries of features. Note: Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select Button ( - ) directly below Channel. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 10 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 11 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Using the Navigation Buttons

Home Button The H button returns you to the Home (default) screen. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the H button is also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. Note: Some features do not require you to press H to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. Data Feature Button

Use this button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. 4-Way Navigation Button

Use this button to scroll up, down, left or right. Press and release one of the button to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the button to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Mode Knob

Use this Mode Knob to scroll through the channels by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. Using the Top Programmable Buttons

Each Top Programmable Button has its feature name or acronym displayed on the softkey below them. The softkey indicates different status when the corresponding Top Programmable Button is pressed or activated. Solid green Indicates the feature is on. Blinking green Indicates the feature is currently busy. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 11 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 12 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The tables below show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.

Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode 14

15

16

17

18 19

20

) l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 7 9

5

4

Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

13

11

12

3

, C F I L O R V Y 2 Key 1 A 1

. B A B C D E D G H E J K F M N G P Q H T U I W X K Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. J Space L Toggle between numeric and letter mode. S Z 12 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 13 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 14

7 9

5

4

Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

13

11

12

3

, c f i l o r v y 2

. b e h k n q u x Key 1 A 1 B a C d D g E j F m G p H t I w K Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. J Space L Toggle between numeric and letter mode. s z 15

16

17

18 19 20

21

) I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 13 English 15

16

17

18 19

20

) O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 14 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

12

13

11

9

7 14

3

, 2

. 5

4

Key 1 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 G 7 H 8 I 9 K 0 J Space L Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 14 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 15 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode 3 2 B E A D Key 1 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 G 7 H 8 I 9 K 0 J Not applicable L Not applicable Number of Times Key is Pressed 8 10 12 13 11 9 14 5 6 7 4 C F 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 15 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 16 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button PTT Button The PTT button on the side of the microphone serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Making a Radio Call on page 33 for more information. Identifying Status Indicators Your radio indicates its operational status through the following:

Status Icons . page 17 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . page 19 Status Icons . page 19 TMS Menu Options . page 20 Call Type Icons . page 21 LED Indicator . page 22 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . page 23 Alert Tones. page 24 Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts. page 27 s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 16 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 17 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Status Icons The 480 x 272 pixel front liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The top two display rows contain color icons that indicate radio operating conditions. Selected icons are also shown on the first row of the 112 x 32 pixel top monochrome display screen of your radio. The following icons are for the front display screen unless indicated otherwise. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. F Call Received Radio has received an Individual Call. Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. O M K Direct On = Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off = Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored (during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On = The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activated. Off = The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deactivated. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s H or . i Power Level L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. 17 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 18 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. View/Program Mode Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady = View mode Blinking = Program mode Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. G n o s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I k m l 18 English Location Signal On = Location feature is enabled, and location signal is available. Off = Location feature is disabled. Blinking = Location feature is enabled, but no location signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On = User is currently associated with the radio. Off = User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Lightbar Alternates between red and blue when the lightbar is on. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 19 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 64 for more information. Status Icons

The following icons appear on the radios display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Y r 3/6 Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of 6 messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 19 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 20 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode.

TMS Menu Options Menu Option Description/Function Back Clr Del Edit Exit No Optn Rply Sel Send Yes Brings you back to the previous screen. Deletes all messages. Deletes a message or text. Brings you to the edit screen. Exits to the Home screen. Returns to the previous screen. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects the highlighted command. Sends the message. Updates or saves a command. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 20 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 21 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Call Type Icons The following icons appear on the radios main display, when you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID.

Landline phone number. Landline phone number added to a Call List. U

Radio number. Radio number added to a Call List. Mobile number. Mobile number added to a Call List. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. Incoming emergency call. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 21 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 22 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Red LED Yellow LED Green LED Solid red Radio is transmitting. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow Channel is busy. Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 22 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 23 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporary changes the backlight of the display screen and the keypad, and adds a color bar to the main display screen to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Orange Emergency Alerts Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio is out of range. The radio enters failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 23 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 24 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Alert Tones An alert tone is a sound or group of sounds. Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of your radios conditions. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Tone Name Heard Short, Low-Pitched Tone Long, Low-Pitched Tone Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Time-Out Timer Timed Out When radio fails its power-up self test. When unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than 6 seconds without any activity. After time out. Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Out of Range Invalid Mode

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed.

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the system. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Busy When system is busy. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 24 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 25 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM You Hear Medium-Pitched Short, Tone Medium-Pitched Long, Tone Tone Name Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received Heard When correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. When activity on a priority channel is received. Emergency Alarm Entry When entering the emergency state. Central Echo Volume Set When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. Emergency Exit When exiting the emergency state. A Group of Medium-Pitched Tones Failsoft Automatic Call Back Talk Permit Keyfail When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request.

(When PTT button is pressed) verifying system accepting transmissions. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is received. Console Acknowledge Received Individual Call When Call Alert or Private Call is received. Call Alert Sent Site Trunking When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 25 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 26 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM You Hear Ringing Low-Pitched Gurgle Unique, Chirp Unique, High-Pitched Chirp Tone Name Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Heard When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.

(When the PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received. New Message When a new message is received. Priority Status When a priority message is received. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 26 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 27 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts The following appears on the radios display when you make and receive Phone calls. The radio also uses alert tones to indicate the current status. You Hear You See When Notes A Long Tone A Busy Tone No phone You press the PTT button and the phone system is not available. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. Phone busy The phone system is busy. Press H to exit the phone mode and try your call later. Phone busy When a channel is not available. The radio automatically connects when a channel opens. No acknowledge A High-

Pitched Tone The call is not acknowledged. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. When you release the PTT button. The radio indicates to the landline party that he or she may begin talking. Note: You have the option of sending additional digits (overdial), such as an extension number, or credit card or PIN numbers, to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for live overdial, every digit entered after the call is connected is sent to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for buffered overdial, the digits pressed are entered into memory and then sent when the PTT button is pressed. Press the PTT button to send either digits or voice, but not both at the same time. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 27 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 28 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM General Radio Operation Once you understand how your APX 7500 Mobile is configured, you are ready to use your radio. Use this navigation guide to familiarize yourself with the basic Call features:

Selecting a Zone . page 28 Selecting a Radio Channel . page 29 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call. page 30 Making a Radio Call . page 33 Repeater or Direct Operation . page 36 Monitoring Features . page 36 n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 28 English Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. Use the following procedure to select a zone. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Rotate the Mode knob until the display shows the desired zone. OR 1 < or > to Zone. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. 3 U or D to the required zone. OR Use the keypad to enter the zone number. 4 If the zone number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat Step 3. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to confirm the displayed zone. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 29 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/

receive frequency pairs. Use the following procedure to select a channel. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. If you select a channel that is not within the preprogrammed band, the radio indicates that it is on an unsupported frequency with both audio and visual warnings. Procedure:

Rotate the Mode knob until the display shows the desired channel. OR 1 < or > to Channel. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Channel. 3 U or D to the required channel. OR Use the keypad to enter the channel number. 4 If the channel number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat Step 3. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to confirm the selected channel. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 29 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 30 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. Red LED Yellow LED Green LED The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting, and solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission

(conventional mode only). There is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission in trunking mode. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 30 English Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen), depending on how your radio is preprogrammed:

1 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The display shows the caller alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 33 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 31 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. These one-to-one calls between two radios are not heard by others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

When you receive a Private Call:

1 You hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. OR Press the Call Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 During the call, the display shows the caller alias (name), if it is in the call list. OR During the call, the display shows the caller ID (number), if the callers name is not in the call list. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Press H or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Resp, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Resp, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 33 for details on making a Private Call. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 31 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 32 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Call Response button to answer a Telephone Call:

1 You hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen and the bar turns green. The display shows Phone Call and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Call Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press H or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. OR Use the Menu Select button to answer a Telephone Call:

1 You hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green. The display shows Phone call and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press H or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to hang up and return to the Home screen. See Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 35 for details on making a Telephone Call. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 32 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 33 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Making a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone switch The Mode Knob A preprogrammed One Touch Call button The Contacts list (see Viewing Details of a Contact on page 49) Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

1 > or < to TalkGrp and press the Menu Select button directly below TalkGrp. The display shows the last-selected talkgroup. Press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR Turn the Mode Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. 4 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The LED lights up solid red. 5 Speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only)

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 33 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 34 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted ID, received ID and your radio ID. 3 U or D to the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to start the Private Call. 5 The display shows Calling... <Number> or Calling...

<Alias>. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. OR If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. Making an Enhanced Private Call (Trunking Only)

This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 56 for more information. Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Enhanced Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted ID, received ID and your radio ID. 3 U or D to the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to start the Private Call. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 34 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 35 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 5 The display shows Calling... <Number> or Calling...

<Alias>. 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. OR If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. OR If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)

This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Phone. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phone. The display shows the last transmitted and received phone number. 3 U or D to the required phone number. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 4 Press and release the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. See Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts on page 27 for more information if your call is NOT answered. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 35 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 36 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Repeater or Direct Operation Monitoring Features The REPEATER operation increases the radios range by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The DIRECT or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Direct. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Direct. 3 The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. OR The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allowing only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. Monitoring a Channel

Procedure:

Lift the microphone off hook. Conventional Modes Only:

1 Listen for activity on that channel. 2 Adjust the Volume knob if necessary. 3 If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start OR Trunked Modes Only:

1 Press the PTT button. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 36 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 37 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 2 If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if you hear no tone and the t indicator lights steadily, then proceed with your message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Monitor momentarily to activate monitoring. The display shows Monitor on. 3 Release the PTT button to receive (listen). If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows Out of range. Conventional Mode Operation

This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus, you can to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from talking over someone elses conversation. Note:

This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. 3 Press the Menu Select button to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows Monitor off. Monitor on shown on the display indicates that the radio is monitoring. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Procedure:

Take the control head off hook. (This is the same as monitor on. You hear all channel traffic.) OR 1 At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, > or < button to Monitor. 37 English Advanced Call Features Calling a Phone Not in the List

1 > or < to Phone. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phone. 3 Enter the desired phone number on the keypad. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press H or Menu Select button directly below Phone to exit. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 38 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Advanced Features Use this navigation guide to learn more about advanced features available with your radio:

Advanced Call Features . page 38 Contacts . page 43 Scan Lists . page 50 Scan . page 52 Call Alert Paging . page 55 Emergency Operation . page 58 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . page 62 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . page 64 Secure Operations . page 76 Security . page 80 The Global Positioning System (GPS) . page 82 Trunking System Controls. page 91 Ignition Switch Options . page 94 Utilities. page 96 s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 38 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 39 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call

Procedure:

1 When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Call received. 2 The speaker unmutes. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Press H to return to the Home screen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Call, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Call, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 39. Making a Selective Call

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 U or D to the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 39 English 3 U or D to Preset for the preset preprogrammed talkgroup. OR U or D to the required talkgroup. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the corresponding talkgroup in the list. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to save the currently selected talkgroup and return to the Home screen. 5 If the encryption key associated to the new talkgroup is erased, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows Key fail. OR If the encryption key that is associated to the new talkgroup is not allowed, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows Illegal key. 6 Press H or the PTT button to exit. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 40 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen.

Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. Note: Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 76 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup

Procedure:

1 < or > to TalkGrp. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TalkGrp. The display shows the last talkgroup that was selected and stored, Select and Exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 40 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 41 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending a Status Call

This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Status button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Status. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Status. 3 The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 4 U or D to the required status. OR Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 5 Press the PTT button to send the status. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 When the dispatcher acknowledges, four tones sound and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. OR If no acknowledgment is received, a low-pitched tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press H or the PTT button.

Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note:

If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, an invalid tone sounds. 41 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 42 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Procedure:

1 When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. A gurgle tone sounds and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. 2 Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped. 3 The display shows Reprgrm rqst and Please wait. 4 If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. OR If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, a low-pitched alert tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press H to cancel and return to the Home screen. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only)

This feature lets you notify the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Rpgm. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 42 English Classifying Regrouped Radios

The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories: Select Enabled or Select Disabled. Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 43 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to 5 IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Note:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.

Note:

Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

Use the Options Menu. 1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the required subscriber alias. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 5 U or D to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 U or D to select the call type. 43 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 44 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 7 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 8 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 9 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. 10 If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. OR Use the PTT button. 1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the required subscriber alias. 4 < or > to scroll through the available IDs for the selected subscriber alias. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 44 English 6 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 7 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid yellow. 8 If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. Adding a New Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to {New Contact} and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 U or D to Name and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 5 The display shows Edit Name and a blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to enter the name. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 45 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the previous screen. 7 U or D to {Add Number} and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 8 U or D to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 9 The display shows Edit Number 1 and a blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to enter the number. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the previous screen. 11 U or D to Type 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. U or D to the required mode and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. OR Repeat Steps 8 through 10 to enter or edit the existing system IDs. OR U or D to {Add Number} and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to add a new number. Repeat Steps 8 through 10. 12 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. 45 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 46 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 13 The display shows <Entry> Stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. 14 The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 The display shows Delete <Entry> confirm?. 6 Select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen for Contacts. OR Select No to return to the main screen for Contacts. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 46 English Adding a Contact to a Call List

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to add to a call list and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Add to CallLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 U or D to the required Call List and press the Menu Select button directly below Add. OR U or D to Cancel to return to the main display for Contacts. 6 The display momentarily shows Please wait before showing <Entry> added to Call List, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. 7 The radio returns to the main display for Contacts. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 47 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Removing a Contact from a Call List

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to remove from a call list and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 The display shows Delete <Entry> confirm?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to remove the entry from the Call List. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main display for Contacts. 7 The display momentarily shows <Entry> deleted, confirming the removal of the contact from the list. 8 The radio returns to the main display for Contacts.

Editing a Contact in a Call List Editing an Entry Alias

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 U or D to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 47 English 6 A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 48 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. Editing as Entry ID

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 U or D to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 48 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 49 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Editing a Call Type

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. Viewing Details of a Contact

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 3 U or D to the entry you want to view and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 U or D to View and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 U or D to Type and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 6 U or D to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK to select. 7 The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. 5 The display shows all the numbers associated with the entry. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 49 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 50 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/

groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List

Procedure:

1 < or > to ScanList. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScanList. 3 U or D to view the members on the list. 4 Press H to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 50 English Editing the Scan List

This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. Procedure:

1 Long press the preprogrammed side button and proceed to Step 3. OR

< or > to ScanList. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScanList. The display shows the lists that can be changed. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Recall to view the next member of the scan list. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 51 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 5 U or D to select more channels to be added or deleted. OR Use the keypad to go directly to additional channels to be added or deleted. OR Use the Mode knob to select additional channels to be added or deleted. 6 Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 52 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status

Procedure:

1 Long press the preprogrammed side button and proceed to Step 3. OR

< or > to ScanList. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScanList. The display shows the lists that can be changed. 3 U or D to the number you want to edit. 4 Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. OR Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 U or D to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. OR Use the keypad to go directly to that scan list member. OR Use the Mode knob to select another scan list member. 6 Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. 51 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 52 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Viewing and Changing the Priority Status

Procedure:

1 Below the Select, Delete, and Recall screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Select to view and/or change the priority status of the currently displayed channel. OR Below the Select, Delete, and Recall screen, press the Select button one or more times to view and/or change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 2 A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. OR A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. OR A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. OR No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 52 English Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button, or turn the preprogrammed Scan switch to the Scan on or Scan off position, to start or stop scan. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Scan. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. 3 The display shows Scan off if scan is disabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan to enable scan. OR The display shows Scan on and the scan status icon if scan is enabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan to disable scan. 4 The radio returns to the Home screen. In the conventional system, while the radio is scanning for activity, you can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls. The respond to these types of O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 53 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM calls are similar as you usually do on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed.

Transmitting While the Scan is On Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below SCAN momentarily. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below PAGE or CALL. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing H or pressing the Menu Select button below either PAGE or CALL.

Making a Dynamic Priority Change (Conventional Scan Only) While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list

(except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. Procedure:

Using the preprogrammed button:

1 When the radio locks onto the channel designated as the new Priority-Two channel, press the preprogrammed Dynamic Priority button. 53 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 54 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 2 The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. OR Using the Menu Select button:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DynP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press H momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Deleting a Nuisance Channel

If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise

(termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Note:

Deleting a nuisance channel is only possible through the preprogrammed Nuisance Channel Delete button. This feature is not accessible through the menu. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 54 English Procedure:

Using the preprogrammed button:

1 When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, press the preprogrammed Nuisance Delete button. 2 The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. OR Using the Menu Select button:

1 When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, >

or < to NuisDel. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below NuisDel. Restoring a Nuisance Channel

Procedure:

To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and then turning it on again. OR Stop and restart a scan via the preprogrammed Scan button or menu. OR Change the channel via the Mode knob. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 55 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Hang Up (HUB)

To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box (HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. Note:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, OR when you press the PTT button. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 55 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 56 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Receiving a Call Alert Page

Procedure:

1 You hear four repeating alert tone and the green LED blinks. OR You hear one alert tone and the green LED blinks if Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled. 2 The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. 3 Press the PTT button to answer. OR Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 33 or Making a Private Call

(Trunking Only) on page 33 for more information on returning the call. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English Sending a Call Alert Page

Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Page. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Page. 3 U or D to the required ID. OR Press Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to send the page. 5 The display shows Paging... <Number>. 6 If the call alert page is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Ack received. OR O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 57 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. 7 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. 8 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen for Contacts. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. 3 U or D to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. 4 If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to send the call alert page. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to exit the screen without sending the call alert page. 6 The display shows Paging... <Alias>. 7 If the call alert page is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Ack received. OR A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 57 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 58 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Top (Orange) button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Only one of the Emergency modes above can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button. Note:

To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English Sending an Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone or channel. A short, medium-pitched tone sounds and the LED rapidly blinks red. OR The display shows No emergency, if the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 When you receive the dispatchers acknowledgment, the display shows Ack received. Four tones sound, the alarm ends, and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. OR If no acknowledgement is received, the display shows No acknowledge. The alarm ends and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 59 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only)

This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel. Note:

The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except, if enabled, it returns to one of the following:

Tactical/Non-Revert You talk on the channel you selected before you entered the emergency state. Non-Tactical/Revert You talk on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent on this same channel. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone or channel. A short, medium-pitched tone sounds and the LED blinks red. OR The display shows No emergency, if the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Emergency Call mode.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone or channel. A short, medium-pitched tone sounds and the LED blinks red. OR The display shows No emergency, if the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 The radio enters the Emergency Call state when:

You receive the dispatchers acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. OR You press the PTT button while in the Emergency Alarm mode. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 59 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 60 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 7 Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Emergency Call mode. Turning the radio off also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to another radio without any audio or visual indicators. Upon acknowledgement, your radios microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the other radio without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. Press and release the PTT button to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode and enter regular dispatch or Emergency Call mode. Note:

For ALL Emergency signals, when changing channels:

If the new channel is also preprogrammed for Emergency, you can change channels while in Emergency operation. The emergency alarm or call continues on the new channel. If the new channel is NOT preprogrammed for Emergency, the display shows No emergency, and you hear an invalid tone until you exit the Emergency state or change to a channel preprogrammed for Emergency. 3 The silent emergency state continues until you:

Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode. OR s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 61 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Emergency Keep-Alive Feature

This feature, when enabled, prevents the radio from being turned off via the On/Off button when the radio is in the Emergency state. Note:

The radio only exits the Emergency state using one of the ways mentioned in the previous sections. See Sending an Emergency Alarm on page 58, Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) on page 59, Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call on page 59, or Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm on page 60. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 61 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 62 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Advanced Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two (2) modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-Server Mode Note:

The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Viewing the Channel which supports ARS Mode

Procedure:

1 < or > to Channel. The display shows n when the selected channel supports ARS Mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English Accessing the User Login Feature

This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example:

Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note: Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (A Z), small letters (a z), numbers (0 9), symbols (*, -, #, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight (8) characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username list may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight (8) characters or more. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 63 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Logging In as a User

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed User Login button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to User. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below User. 3 The display shows the User Login screen. 4 U or D to {ID Entry} and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears beside Id:. Use the keypad to enter a username. OR U or D to scroll through the list of predefined usernames. Press the Menu Select button directly below Login to select the predefined username. OR Press and hold U or D to scroll through the list of predefined usernames at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Login to select the predefined username. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. Repeat Step 4. OR A blinking cursor appears beside PIN:. Use the keypad to enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number appears as asterisks. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Login. 7 In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and In progress, with Cancel. OR In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and Logged in, with Logout and Exit. OR In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline, with Logout and Exit. 8 If the username is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows Login failed. Repeat Step 4. OR If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows Login failed. Repeat Step 6. OR 63 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 64 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to cancel the login in progress screen and return to the initial user login screen. OR Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logout and Exit. Logging Out

Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logout. 2 The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and Clear private data?. 3 Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display momentary shows Private data cleared. OR Select No to keep your private data. Note: Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Text Messaging Service (TMS) This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. There are three (3) types of text messages:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:

Inbox Compose Drafts Sent Note: See Status Icons on page 17 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 20 for more information on each menu option. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 65 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Accessing the TMS Features

Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the main menu options. Composing and Sending a New Text Message

Note: During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-

tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. During the numeric mode, except for A, pressing the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap). Procedure:

1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. 4 U or D to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to compose a new message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 65 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 66 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 5 A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options once the message is composed. 7 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 8 U or D to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR U or D to {Other Recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 66 English Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 9 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 10 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. 11 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Msg sent. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Send failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 68 for more information. You can also select the Save to Drafts option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 72 for more information. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 67 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending a Quick Text Message

Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. 4 U or D to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Select for a predefined message. 5 U or D to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to select the required message. 6 The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 8 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 9 U or D to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR U or D to {Other Recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. 67 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 68 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 10 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 11 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. 12 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Msg sent. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Send failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 68 for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English

Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message.

Note:

Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to indicate the message as important. 3 The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 69 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to remove the priority status from the message. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to request for a reply. 3 The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to remove the priority status from the message. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s

Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to indicate the message as important. AND 69 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 70 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM U or D to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to request for a reply. 3 The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar.

Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to indicate the message as important. AND U or D to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to request for a reply. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar.

Managing Text Messages Receiving a Text Message

Note: When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send back a notification that the radio has received such message. Procedure:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox and go to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 The new message icon appears and the display momentarily shows New msg. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. 3 The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 71 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. Note: U or D to read the message if fills more than one screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Select. 4 The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. 5 U or D to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Select to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Reply, Delete, or Back to access the option. Select Reply to configure the message settings. Select Delete to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons on page 19 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message

Note:

The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

1 U or D to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Select to view the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reply to reply to a message. 3 U or D to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR U or D to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Select for a predefined message. 71 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 72 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM OR U or D to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to select the required message. 4 A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. OR The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options once you have finished writing the message. 7 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to send the message. 8 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 68 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder

This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Procedure:

1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Drafts and press the Menu Select button below Select. 4 The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. 5 U or D to the required text message press the Menu Select button directly below Edit, Delete., or Back to access the option. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 73 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Function of each option:

Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Select Delete to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Select. 4 The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. 5 U or D to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Select to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Options, Delete, or Back to access the option. Select Options to configure the message settings. Select Delete to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons on page 19 for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 73 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 74 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending a Sent Text Message

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options while viewing the message. 2 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 U or D to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR U or D to {Other Recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 5 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 68 for more information. Deleting a Text Message

Procedure:

From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen:

1 U or D to scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete the current message. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 75 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Deleting All Text Messages

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Select to select all messages in the folder. OR U or D to Drafts and press the Menu Select button below Select to select all messages in the folder. OR U or D to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Select to select all messages in the folder. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Clear. 5 The display shows Delete All Messages Confirm?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all the messages in the selected folder. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main TMS screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 75 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 76 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Enabling the Secure Transmission

1 > or < to Secure and press the Menu Select button directly below SEC. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 2 The display shows m, Secure on and the current key, if multi-key has been enabled. 3 Monitor the mode to be sure it is not in use. 4 Press PTT button to transmit. Note:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows Clear TX only. The radio will not transmit until you disable the secure mode. 76 English Clearing the Secure Transmission

1 > or < to Secure and press the Menu Select button directly below SEC. 2 The m disappears and the display shows Secure off.

Managing Encryption Loading the Encryption Key(s)

Note: Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. Procedure:

1 Attach the KVL to your radio. 2 The display shows Keyloading, and all other radio functions are locked out, except for power down, and volume. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Target. 4 Press the Menu Select button below Load. 5 Press the Menu Select button below Key for single-key. OR Press the Menu Select button below Group for multikey. 6 > or < to the required key or group. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 77 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 7 Press the Menu Select button below Load to load the key to your radio. 8 When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds a short tone for single-key radios. OR When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds an alternating tone for multikey radios. Using the Multikey Feature

This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied

(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through Customer Programming Software. In addition, you can have operator-

selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-

selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If you use your radio for both conventional and trunked applications, you have to strap your encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, you may strap a different key to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-

selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key

Procedure:

1 < or > to Key. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 U or D to scroll through the encryption keys. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. 5 If the selected key is erased, a momentary keyfail tone sounds and the display shows Key fail. OR If the selected key is not allowed, a momentary illegal key tone sounds and the display shows Illegal key. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 77 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 78 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Selecting a Keyset

This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. Note: Press H, the PTT button, or the Exit menu selection, or turn the Mode knob to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Procedure:

1 < or > to KeySet. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KeySet. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. 3 U or D to scroll through the keysets. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to save the newly selected keyset. 5 Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys

This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. Procedure:

1 < or > to Erase. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Erase. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 U or D to the desired encryption key. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. The display shows the available key erase options. 5 U or D to the required option and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 At Erase all keys?, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to erase all the encryption keys in the radio OR No to return to the previous screen. OR O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 79 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM At Erase single key?, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to erase the displayed encryption key OR No to return to the previous screen. 7 Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit.

Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. Procedure:

1 < or > to Rekey. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rekey. 3 Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. OR Press the PTT button again, or the Home or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. 4 If the rekey operation fails, a bad-key tone sounds and the display shows Rekey fail. Note:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). This key must be loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page

This feature allows to view or define MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features.It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode and only for conventional communications. In additional to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgements, and Power-

up Acknowledgements. Some of the options selected may also need to be set up at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 79 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 80 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Hear Clear

There are two components of Hear Clear. 1 Companding:

Reduces the channel noise, e.g. OTA transmission, that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expander expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. 2 Random FM Noise Canceller (Flutter Fighter):

Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving in a transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are cancelled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English Security Using the Radio Lock

This feature changes your radio to a more robust security system that protects the use of the secure encryption keys. If this feature is enabled in your radio by a qualified radio technician, when you turn the radio on, the display shows Radio locked. Unlocking Your Radio

Procedure:

1 Enter your numeric password. Secure-equipped radios 6 to 8 characters. Clear radios 0 to 8 characters. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to enter the code. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to exit the feature. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 81 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 3 If the password is correct, the radio unlocks. OR If the password is incorrect, the display show Incorrect password and the radio remains locked. If you enter three incorrect passwords in a row, the display shows Deadlock. Turn the radio off and then on, and begin again at Step 1. IMPORTANT:

For Secure Radios Only After a total of 17 consecutive incorrect passwords (turning the radio off and on does not reset this number), the radio erases all of its encryption keys and shows Deadlock. See a qualified radio technician. If you forget the password, enter ******** to erase all keys and revert the password in the radio back to the default password of 01234567. Changing Your Password

Procedure:

1 < or > to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. 3 Enter the old password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK. 5 Enter the new password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 7 Re-enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select. The password is updated. OR If the two passwords do not match, repeat Steps 5 through 8. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. 81 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 82 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature

(Secure Radios Only) This feature allows you to enable or disable the radio lock feature. It is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Procedure:

1 < or > to LogOff. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LogOff. 3 Display shows Pswd enabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. OR Display shows Pswd disabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English The Global Positioning System (GPS) This feature uses information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your radio, expressed as latitude and longitude. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are very difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. Understanding the GPS Feature

The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites, to establish the location coordinates, maximizing your view of clear unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

In underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 83 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Note: Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 20 meters from your actual location, but sometimes further away. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note:

The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. Enhancing GPS Performance

Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, please note the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and a large amount of open sky. Using the Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)

This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 83 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 84 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. Programmable Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Waypoints Fixed location coordinates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destination coordinates are editable. Coordinates cannot be deleted. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature

Note: An ON menu key may be present on the location menu if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed GPS button to toggle the Outdoor Location feature on or off. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Location. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Location. 3 The display shows Location off. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to obtain a location fix. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. U or D to Turn On GPS and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 The front display shows the latitude, longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 85 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Refresh to obtain a new location fix. 7 The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. 8 Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current latitude and longitude, along with the UTC (Zulu) time and date that the location fix was obtained. The location coordinates are updated automatically every five seconds while the location signal is present. OR If the radio fails to get a location fix, the display shows No service and returns to the previous display. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H, the PTT button (if preprogrammed), or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. The radio also exits the menu if the emergency button is pressed. Saving a Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Save As Waypnt and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR U or D to Save As Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Select and proceed to Step 5. OR U or D to Save As Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Select and proceed to Step 5. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 A blinking cursor appears in the Save As Waypnt screen. Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. OR 85 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 86 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. 5 The display shows Current loc saved as <Waypoint name>. OR The display shows Current loc saved as {Home}. OR The display shows Current loc saved as {Destination}. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. Viewing a Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English 4 U or D to scroll through the list. OR U or D to select a waypoint to view the location information in full. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 6 U or D to View and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to view the latitude, longitude, time and date of the selected waypoint. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. Editing the Alias of a Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 87 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 5 U or D to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. Use the keypad to edit the alias. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the Waypoints main screen. 8 The display shows <Waypoint name> Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 87 English 7 A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Location screen. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the previous screen. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done with the new coordinates. 10 The display shows {Home} Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. OR The display shows {Destination} Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 88 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint

Note: Only the preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination are editable. Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to {Home} and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. OR U or D to {Destination} and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 5 U or D to Edit Location and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 The first number blinks. Press < to move to the previous number/coordinates. Press > to move back to the next number/coordinates. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to change the number/coordinates. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 89 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. Deleting All Saved Waypoints

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. U or D to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Delete. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete. 5 The display shows Delete <Waypoint name> Confirm?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. 7 The display momentarily shows <Waypoint name>

deleted before the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to a saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 5 U or D to Delete All and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 The display shows Delete All saved waypnts Confirm?. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. 8 The display momentarily shows All saved waypnts deleted before the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 89 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 90 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint

Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to the required waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 91 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Trunking System Controls Using the Failsoft System

The failsoft System ensures continuous radio communications during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio stays at the failsoft operation and continues to transmit on current channel. User can also change to another channel although the transmission is in Failsoft System. Procedure:

1 During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. 2 A medium-pitched tone sounds every 10 seconds and the display shows Failsoft. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. Going Out of Range

When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. Procedure:

1 A low-pitched tone sounds. AND/OR The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. 2 Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until:

It locks onto a control channel. OR It locks onto a failsoft channel. OR It is turned off. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 91 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 92 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM SmartZone

The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Head the RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. Using the Site Trunking Feature

If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Site trunking. Note: When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English Locking and Unlocking a Site

This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button to toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Lock to lock the site. The display shows Site locked. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Unlock to unlock the site. The display shows Site unlocked. 4 The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 93 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Viewing and Changing a Site

This feature allows you to view the number of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. 2 The display momentarily shows the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator

(RSSI). Changing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. 2 A tone sounds and the display momentarily shows Scanning site. 3 When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Using the Trunked Announcement

The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption:

When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-Ruthless Preemption:

When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-type busy tone, followed by a call back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. 93 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 94 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Initiating an Announcement

If your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls:

Procedure:

1 Press the Mode Knob to locate the announcement-group mode. 2 Press the microphone PTT button to initiate the announcement. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English Ignition Switch Options This feature allows the user to select the radios functionality based on the Ignition State of the radio users vehicle. The available options are as follows. Blank

This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the Ignitions current state. Tx Inhibit

This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the Ignitions current state. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any Trunking dispatch communications since the radio will not affiliate with the Trunking systems. PTT Tx Inhibit

This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the Ignitions current state. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the Trunking systems. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 95 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Required

This option allows the user to power on the radio only if the Ignition is present. The radio can be powered off either through Power button press or when Ignition is lost. In addition, the radio automatically powers on when the Ignition is present only if the radio was turned off due to the ignition being removed. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Soft Power Off

This option allows the user to power on the radio either through Power button presses or when the Ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button was pressed or the Ignition was removed, the radio will be turned off. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Ignition Only Power Up

This option allows the user to power on the radio only when Ignition is detected and will power off when it is removed. The radio does not power on or off with the Power button press. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Note: While "Ignition" is not present, the radio powers-off with a radio-user Power Off button / knob selection if the radio was powered-up with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press or Ignition Auto Power Off timer is running. While "Ignition" is present, the radio powers-on with a radio-user Power On button / knob selection only if the radio was powered-down with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer. Emergency Power Up

This feature allows the user to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a footswitch. In addition, when the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit, this feature will not be available to the users. Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 95 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 96 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Auto Power Off Timer

Auto Power Off feature powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. There two different version of Auto Power Off:

Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the radio is power-on. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. Ignition Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the vehicle key is removed, when the voltage at the ignition sense is removed. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. When the vehicle key is reapplied, the voltage at the ignition is reconnected, this timer is stopped. Although both Inactivity Auto Power Off and Ignition Auto Power Off can be enabled together, Ignition Auto Power Off timer is mutually exclusive with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer when both are enabled. During the last two minutes of the timer countdown, the radio generates continuous low tone and blinks Powering Off warning on the display until the timer expires or is reset. The radio automatically powers off after the timer expires. The duration of the timer is preprogrammed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English Utilities Viewing the Recent Calls List

This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) Note:

The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Recent Calls button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Recent. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Recent to access the Recent Calls feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the list. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 97 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. OR Press H or the PTT button to return to the Home screen. If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, and the radio is left idle, the radio automatically exits the feature when the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Selecting the Power Level

You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Settings:

Select Low for a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Select High for a longer transmitting distance. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level Switch to toggle the power level between low and high. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Power. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Power. 3 The display shows Low power and the low power icon. OR The display shows High power and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile

This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, and the radio is left idle, the radio automatically exits the feature when the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Profile button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Profile. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Profile to access the Profiles feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the menu selections. 97 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 98 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to select the required radio profile. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. 5 The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Procedure:

Press k to enable the radios backlight, LED and tones. OR Press k to disable the radios backlight, LED and tones. Stealth Mode profile setting can also be saved during power off, and reloaded upon radio power up if preprogrammed. Toggling the Day or Night Display Mode

j allows you to toggle between Day or Night Mode. Procedure:

Press j to toggle between Day or Night Mode of the display. The last selected mode can be saved during power off and reloaded upon radio power up if preprogrammed. Selecting the Stealth Mode

k allows you to toggle Stealth Mode on or off. Pressing k disables the radios backlight, LED and tones if preprogrammed. The radio reverts back to the current profile settings once the Stealth Mode is off. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button to turn the tones off or on. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Mute. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. 3 The display momentarily shows Tones off, indicating that the keypad tones are disabled. OR The display momentarily shows Tones on, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the keypad tones are enabled. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 99 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Turning Voice Mute On or Off

You can enable and disable voice transmission as needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button to turn the feature on or off. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to VMute. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMute. 3 The display momentarily shows Voice mute off, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is disabled. OR The display momentarily shows Voice mute on, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer

This feature turns off your radios transmitter. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. Note: You will hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. Procedure:

1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LED goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 Press the PTT button to re-transmit. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 99 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 100 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Digital Options

One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Analog Options

Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Mode Carrier squelch (C) PL or DPL Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Option Result Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch (COS) Normal Squelch Selective Switch You hear any digital traffic. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature

This feature allows you to override any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed in a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. Procedure:

Remove the microphone from the hub to enable the PL Defeat feature. You hear any activity on the channel. OR The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note: When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 101 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Digital PTT ID Feature

This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. Your radios ID number is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, your radios ID is sent continuously during the voice message. Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)

Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. Three variations of smart PTT are available:

Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code Transmit Inhibit on Correct NAC Transmit Inhibit on Status Symbols Description You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or

(if secure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. You cannot transmit when the radio is in a NAC operated digital voice call channel. You cannot transmit when the radio is in a digital voice call with the last signal status bit as inbound busy or unknown. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 101 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 102 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using Quick-Key Override

As Smart PTT feature prevents your radio to transmit when the current channel is busy, you can perform a Double PTT to force a key-up and transmission to override the Smart PTT. Note: Double PTT is quick press of the PTT twice. Accessing the General Radio Information

Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Information IP Display Control Assignments Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, or when the radio is left idle and the timer expires, the radio automatically exits the feature. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.

Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following information of your radio:

Host Version Secure Version CH 1 4 Version

(depending on the number of channels connected.) Siren Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number MCHIB Version CHIB Version TIB Version URC Version Serial Number Flash Size & Type RF Band Processor Version Note: Press H at any time to return to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 103 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to Radio Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 The display shows the Information screen. 5 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Viewing the IP Information

This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to IP Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 The display shows the IP Info screen. 5 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. 103 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 104 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Viewing the Control Assignments

This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the channel currently selected. See Programmable Features on page 8 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 The display shows the Control Map screen. 5 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English Using the Directional Buttons

The function of these buttons are only available with a Universal Relay Controller (URC). These buttons allow you to trigger the lights on the lightbar on or off. Each button is dedicated for different direction of lights. d Front Spot Light a Left Alley Light b Right Alley Light These lightbars can be customized with different lighting patterns as well. Procedure:

1 Press d, a or b to activate the required lights. 2 Press d, a or b again to deactivate the required lights. Note:

This feature can also be programmed on other programmable buttons on the O9 control head. The programmable buttons on the external tool or equipment attached to the radio, e.g. microphone, external DEK and etc, do not support this feature. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 105 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Siren Control Keyapad

These buttons allow you to activate or deactivate different types of sirens. The function of each button is shown as below. f Air horn e Manual i Wail h Yelp g HiLo Except the Air horn button, these buttons have green backlight to indicate it is activated. Procedure:

1 Press either one of the Siren Control button to activate the required siren. 2 Press the same button again to turn off the siren. OR Press either one of the button to change to another siren.

Using the Manual Siren Button for Manual Siren Tone e can be preprogrammed to trigger Manual Siren tone. The duration of the tone depends on the duration of pressing and holding the button. After the button is released, the Manual Siren Wail tone falls until the tone is mute. Procedure:

1 Press e. The Manual Siren tone sounds. 2 Release e when required. 3 The Manual Siren tone stops immediately. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 105 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 106 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Using the Manual Siren Button as Siren Types Selector e can also be preprogrammed as siren types selector. For example, pressing the button changes the current siren tone to another siren tone. Procedure:

When a siren tone is sounding, 1 Press e to change the siren. 2 Repeat step 1 to change to another siren. OR Press the preprogrammed siren button to turn off the siren. Using the Public Address Button

This button enables the external speaker to be able to transmit the radio user announcement publicly. Procedure:

Press c to toggle the public address feature on or off. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English Using the Response Selector

The Response Selector is mainly designed to control the lightbar. The recommended application of Response Selector for the lightbar is as below. Turn to 0 the lightbar is off. Turn to 1 the lightbar is in take down mode. Turn to 2 the lightbar is in pursuit mode without the siren. Turn to 3 the lightbar is in pursuit mode with siren enabled. Once you turn the knob to the required number, except 0, the number will have green backlight to indicate it is activated. Response Selector can also be preprogrammed to support other functions such as siren, send status update and GPS. Procedure:

1 Turn the knob to 1, 2 or 3. The radio executes the preprogrammed actions. 2 Turn to another number to change the required actions. OR Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the actions. Note:

If the Response Selector is pointing at 1, 2 or 3 during power up, the radio will execute the selected actions upon powering up. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 107 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Universal Relay Controller

The Universal Relay Controller (URC) is a versatile relay module that controls how the patterns on the Light Bar operate. The URC receives logic level input signals which are configured or conditioned by PLCs, process controllers and indicators to switch on/off a series of output signals. The URC supports up to 25 customized patterns; each pattern is a combination of 10 relays in the URC. The buttons or knob which support URC are:

Response Selector Directional Buttons Top/Bottom Programmable Buttons URC also supports Action Consolidation feature to run the lightbar. Consult a qualified radio technician for details on customizing different relay patterns using the radio's programming software. Using External Alarms (Horn and Lights)

All control heads can be equipped for external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. Note:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) alternating with the selected mode, until it is turned off. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows HORN/LITES OFF. 107 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 108 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using Permanent Horn and Lights

If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically turn on when the radio powers up. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected alarm(s). The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. Changing the Selected Alarms

Procedure:

1 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. 2 U or D to required selection. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to return to Home mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English Using the Gun Lock

This feature enables the radio to control from up to three gun locks. There are four configurations on the programmable buttons for this feature. Gun Lock 1 triggers first gun lock to open Gun Lock 2 triggers second gun lock to open Gun Lock 3 triggers third gun lock to open All Gun Locks triggers all gun locks to open concurrently but close in a sequence with a few seconds of difference in between. Due to security purposes, there are neither any text nor icon are displayed for this feature. Unlocking Single Gun Lock

Procedure:

With relock timer:

1 Press the required preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. The required Gun Lock opens. 2 Place your gun on the Gun Lock. OR Remove your gun from the Gun Lock. 3 The lock closes when the timer expires. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 109 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM OR Without relock timer, or the relock timer is set to zero:

1 Press and hold the required preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. The required Gun Lock opens. 2 Place the required gun on the Gun Lock. OR Remove the required gun from the Gun Lock. OR Without relock timer:

1 Press and hold the preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. All the Gun Locks open. 2 Place the required guns on the Gun Locks. OR Remove the required guns from the Gun Locks. 3 Release the required preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. The Gun Lock closes. 3 Release the preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. All the Gun Locks close. Unlocking All Gun Locks

Procedure:

With relock timer:

1 Press the preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. All the Gun Locks open concurrently. 2 Place your guns on the Gun Locks in the sequence from Gun Lock 1 to Gun Lock 3. OR Remove your guns from the Gun Locks in the sequence from Gun Lock 1 to Gun Lock 3. 3 The locks close when the timer for each lock expires. The locks are arranged in the sequence from Gun Lock 1 to Gun Lock 3. Using the Voice Announcement

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Each voice announcement is within a limit of three seconds maximum. The sum total duration for all voice announcements in a radio shall be no more than 1000 seconds. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 109 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 110 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM The features which Voice Announcement supports are:

Zone Channel Scan Monitor Talkaround/Direct Tx Inhibit Note: Voice announcements support certain number of zone-

channel, but not all. Seek advice from your dealer or qualified technician for the best selections for this feature. The two options of priority for the Voice Announcement available are:

High enables the voice of the feature to announce even when the radio is receiving calls. Low disables the voice of the feature from announcing when the radio is receiving calls. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English Procedure:

You hear a voice announcement when the features below are preprogrammed in the radio. The radio powers up. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Press the preprogrammed voice announcement button

(which specifically programmed to playback the current zone and channel). The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Note: Pressing this preprogrammed playback button will always enable the voice feature to announce in High priority. All the three programmable buttons at the side of the radio support this feature. Change to a new zone. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Change to a new channel within the current zone. The radio announces the current channel. Press either the Menu Select button or preprogrammed button of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, Monitor, Talkaround/Direct or Transmit Inhibit. The radio announces the corresponding feature activation or deactivation. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 111 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Action Consolidation Mode

This feature allows the radio to execute a series of actions by pressing a preprogrammed button or by turning the Response Selector. Features allowed for Action Consolidation are as below. Activates the lightbar with patterns Activates the siren Switches to predefined zone or channel for Talkaround or Direct Mode Sends a status update to dispatch for Talkaround or Direct Mode Sends a GPS report Except Group Call, all other activities are blocked during Action Consolidation. Note:

These feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. Action for either Siren, Lightbar or Gunlock can only be activated one at a time in Action Consolidation mode. Activating the Action Consolidation Activities

Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed button of Action Consolidation. The display shows the activities of the required programs run by the radio. Top Programmable Buttons Only:

The LCD label flashes to indicate the feature is active. 2 The radio reverts back to normal when Action Consolidation activities are complete. OR The display shows Action Consolidation Failed. The Failed Actions screen appears. The screen shows a list of actions that failed to run. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 111 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 112 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Deactivating the Action Consolidation Activities

When the radio is running activities of the Action Consolidation, the following interruptions shall end the Action Consolidation activities. Procedure:

Press H. The display shows Action Consolidation Cancelled. The radio ends the transmission and reverts to Home mode. OR Press PTT button to transmit. The display shows Action Consolidation Cancelled. The radio ends the transmission and reverts to Home mode. OR Press Emergency button or received an Emergency message. The display shows Action Consolidation Cancelled. The radio ends the transmission and reverts to Home mode and launch emergency. The Siren and Lightbar activities run by Action Consolidation are not deactivated in step 2, but continue until they are completely or manually disabled. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 113 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Helpful Tips Take a moment to review the following:

Caring for Your Radio . page 113 Caring for Your Radio The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems.

C a u t i o n The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. l H e p f u l i T p s 113 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 114 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Accessories For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorola.com/governmentandenterprise On the website, search for APX 7500 Multi-Band Mobile Radio. You will see the accessories information besides the specifications of the radio. You can also contact your dealer for details. s e i r o s s e c c A 114 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 115 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Take a moment to review the following:

Special Channel Assignments. page 115 Operating Frequency Requirements . page 116 Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel

If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 2 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. 3 4 State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination State the nature of the distress. Specify what kind of assistance you need. State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 5 6 7 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. OVER. 9 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel

For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. A p p e n d i x

M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 115 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 116 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Operating Frequency Requirements Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M i

x d n e p p A A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note: Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.050 156.100 Receive 160.650 160.700 Channel Number 1 2 116 English Channel Number

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

18 19 20

22 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 Receive 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 117 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) Channel Number

24 25 26 27 28 60

62 63

65 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725 Receive 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725 Channel Number Frequency (MHz) Transmit Receive 75 76 77**

78 79 80

84 85 86 87 88

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only

*** Guard band Note: A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. A p p e n d i x

M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 117 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 118 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. Term Definition ACK Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. Acknowledgment of communication. Analog Signal ARS ASTRO 25 Trunking ASTRO Conventional Autoscan Call Alert An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Automatic Registration Service Motorola standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola standard for wireless digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Privately page an individual by sending an audible tone. y r a s s o G l 118 English Term Definition Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting

(turning on) a receivers audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics such as transmit/

receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-

way/data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater (see Trunking). A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Carrier Squelch Central Controller Channel Control Channel Conventional Conventional Scan List O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 119 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Term Definition Term Definition Cursor CP Deadlock DEK Digital Private Line (DPL) Digital Signal Dispatcher DSP Dynamic Regrouping ESN A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. Codeplug Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio.The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. Direct Entry Keypad or Keyboard A type of coded squelch using data bursts. Similar to PL except a digital code is used instead of a tone. An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio system management duties. Digital Signal Processing A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Electrical Serial Number l G o s s a r y A feature that allows communications to take place even though the central controller has failed. Each trunked repeater in the system transmits a data word informing every radio that the system has gone into failsoft. Federal Communications Commission. Frequency Modulation Disconnect. The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Key-variable loader: A device for loading encryption keys into the radio. Liquid crystal display Light-emitting diode A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display selection of these features is controlled by the - button. Millennium Conrol Head Board Failsoft FCC FM Hang Up Home screen KVL LCD LED Menu Entry MCHB 119 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 120 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Term Definition Term Definition Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. A scan list that can include both talkgroups

(trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. The user talks on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Over-the-air rekeying A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. A set of unique features specific to a radio. Personal Identification Number. Monitor Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List Network Access Code Non-Tactical/

Revert OTAR Page Personality PIN y r a s s o G l 120 English Preprogrammed Refers to a software feature that has been Private

(Conversation) Call Private Line

(PL) Programmable PTT Radio Frequency (RF) Repeater activated by a qualified radio technician. A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the talkgroup. A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Refers to a radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-To-Talk the PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit (send) operation when pressed. The part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). A conventional radio feature, where you talk through a receive/transmit facility that re-transmits received signals, in order to improve communications range and coverage. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 121 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Term Definition Term Definition Selective Call Selective Switch Squelch Standby Status Calls Tactical/

Non-Revert Talkaround A feature that allows you to call a select individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Special electronic circuitry, added to the receiver of a radio, that reduces, or cuts off, unwanted signals before they are heard in the speaker. An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. The user talks on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. Bypass a repeater and talk directly to another unit for easy local unit-to-unit communications. Talkgroup TMS Trunking Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List USK UTC An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communication path. Text Messaging Service The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users

(see Conventional). A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Unique Shadow Key Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard (formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich

(up to 180 degrees) is later in time;

everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym =

Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. l G o s s a r y 121 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 122 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Term Definition Zone A grouping of channels. y r a s s o G l 122 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 123 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Commercial Warranty Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX 7500 Mobile Units Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y 123 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 124 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. C)Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

A) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. B) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C 124 English D)Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F) Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G)Rechargeable batteries if:

(1) any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.

(2) the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H)Freight costs to the repair depot. I) A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J) Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K) Normal and customary wear and tear. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 125 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A) that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

B) that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C)should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y 125 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 126 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Notes s e t o N 126 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 1 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 2 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Motorola, Inc. 1301, E. Algonquin Rd. Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. 2010 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. October 2010.

*68007024014*

68007024014-B

 

 

O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 1 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM APX 7500 User Guide O9 Control Head 68007024014-B O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 2 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 3 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM m ASTRO APX 7500 Series Digital Mobile Radios Quick Reference Card Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance

C a u t i o n Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio. ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio (Motorola Publication part number 6881095C99) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. Radio On/Off Press the Power On/Off button to toggle the power on or off. Adjusting Volume Turn the Volume knob clockwise to increase volume or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Selecting a Zone 1 > or < to Zone. Press the Menu Select button directly under the Zone. 2 U or D button until the desired zone is displayed. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to confirm the displayed zone. 4 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone channel. 2010 by Motorola, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 06/10 1301 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. 1 2 3 4 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 Selecting a Channel 1 > or < to Channel. Press the Menu Select button directly under the Channel. 2 U or D button until the desired channel is displayed. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to confirm the selected channel. 4 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone channel. Radio Controls 1 Turn the Mode Knob to scroll to the required channel. 2 Press PTT button to transmit on the selected zone channel. 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Siren Control Buttons Programmable Buttons (Top) Response Selector Directional Buttons Orange Button Public Address Button Keypad Data Feature Button Mode Knob 4-Way Navigation Button Home Button Satus Icons Programmable Buttons

(Bottom) Menu Select Buttons Volume Knob Display Backlight Control Buttons LED Indicators Power On/Off Button Receiving and Transmitting 1 Take the microphone off hook. 2 Select zone/channel. 3 Listen for a transmission. OR Turn the Volume Knob. OR

> or < to Monitor then press the Menu Select button directly below Monitor and listen for activity. 4 Adjust volume, if necessary. 5 Press the PTT button to transmit; release to receive.

*PMLN5711A*

PMLN5711A English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 4 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending an Emergency Alarm 1 Press the Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display shows EMERGENCY and the current zone or channel. 2 A dispatcher acknowledgment ACK RECEIVED display follows. AND, Trunking Only:

A high-pitched tone indicates that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 3 Press and hold the emergency button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) 1 Press the Emergency button. 1 A tone sounds and the display shows EMERGENCY and the current zone or channel. OR A talk prohibited tone sounds when the selected channel does not support emergency. 2 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT to end the transmission. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm 1 Press the Emergency button to activate the silent alarm feature. 2 The display does not change; the LED does not light up, and there is no tone. English If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. Display Status Icons F O M K HOR . i Receiving a call or data Transmitting a call or data Received an Individual Call. The more stripes, the stronger the signal strength for the current site

(trunking only). Direct radio to radio communication or connected through a repeater. On = Direct Off = Repeater This channel is being monitored. Voice muting the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel. On = Enabled Off = Disabled L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scanning a scan list. Blinking dot = Detects activity on the Priority-One Channel during scan. Steady dot = Detects activity on the Priority-Two Channel during scan. k m l G n o Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady = View mode. Blinking = Program mode. The vote scan feature is enabled. On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. location signal available. On = Location feature enabled, and Off = Location feature disabled. Blinking = Location feature enabled, but location signal unavailable. the radio. with the radio. On = User is currently associated with Off = User is currently not associated Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data activity is present. Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Alternates between red and blue when the lightbar is on.

< or > to Menu Entry.

- directly below Menu Entry to select. U or D to scroll through sub-list.

- directly below Menu Entry to select. H to exit. Menu Navigation O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page i Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc. Address: 1301 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: APX 7500 conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. D e c l a r a t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y i English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page ii Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. y t i m r o f n o C f o n o i t a r a l c e D ii English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page iii Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Contents This User Guide contains all the information you need to use the APX 7500 Series Digital Mobile Radios. Declaration of Conformity . i Important Safety Information . ix Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance . ix Software Version . ix Computer Software Copyrights . x Documentation Copyrights . x Disclaimer . x Getting Started . 1 How to Use This Guide . 1 Notations Used in This Manual . 1 Additional Performance Enhancement . 2 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) . 2 CrossTalk Prevention . 2 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) . 2 SecureNet . 2 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You . 3 Preparing Your Radio for Use . 3 Turning On the Radio . 4 Validating Compatibility During Power Up . 5 Adjusting the Volume . 5 Adjusting the Display Backlight . 6 C o n t e n t s Identifying Radio Controls . 6 Radio Parts and Controls . 7 Programmable Features . 8 Assignable Radio Functions . 8 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . 10 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . 10 Using the Menu Select Buttons . 10 Using the Navigation Buttons . 11 Home Button . 11 Data Feature Button . 11 4-Way Navigation Button . 11 Mode Knob . 11 Using the Top Programmable Buttons . 11 iii English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page iv Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Keypad . 12 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . 12 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . 13 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . 14 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . 15 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . 16 Identifying Status Indicators . 16 Status Icons . 17 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . 19 Status Icons . 19 TMS Menu Options . 20 Call Type Icons . 21 LED Indicator . 22 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . 23 Alert Tones . 24 Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts . 27 General Radio Operation . 28 Selecting a Zone . 28 Selecting a Radio Channel . 29 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . 30 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call . 30 s t n e t n o C iv English Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking Only) . 31 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) . 32 Making a Radio Call . 33 Making a Talkgroup Call . 33 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) . 33 Making an Enhanced Private Call (Trunking Only) .34 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) . 35 Repeater or Direct Operation . 36 Monitoring Features . 36 Monitoring a Channel . 36 Conventional Mode Operation . 37 Advanced Features . 38 Advanced Call Features . 38 Calling a Phone Not in the List . 38 Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) . 39 Receiving a Selective Call . 39 Making a Selective Call . 39 Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) . 40 Selecting a Talkgroup . 40 Sending a Status Call . 41 O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page v Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only) . 41 Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) . 42 Classifying Regrouped Radios . 42 Contacts . 43 Making a Private Call from Contacts . 43 Adding a New Contact Entry . 44 Deleting a Contact Entry . 46 Adding a Contact to a Call List . 46 Removing a Contact from a Call List . 47 Editing a Contact in a Call List . 47 Editing an Entry Alias . 47 Editing as Entry ID . 48 Editing a Call Type . 49 Viewing Details of a Contact . 49 Scan Lists . 50 Viewing a Scan List . 50 Editing the Scan List . 50 Changing the Scan List Status . 51 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status . 52 Scan . 52 Turning Scan On or Off . 52 Transmitting While the Scan is On . 53 Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan . 53 Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan . 53 C o n t e n t s Making a Dynamic Priority Change (Conventional Scan Only) . 53 Deleting a Nuisance Channel . 54 Restoring a Nuisance Channel . 54 Hang Up (HUB) . 55 Call Alert Paging . 55 Receiving a Call Alert Page . 56 Sending a Call Alert Page . 56 Emergency Operation . 58 Sending an Emergency Alarm . 58 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) . 59 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call . 59 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm . 60 Using the Emergency Keep-Alive Feature . 61 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . 62 Viewing the Channel which supports ARS Mode . 62 Accessing the User Login Feature . 62 Logging In as a User . 63 Logging Out . 64 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . 64 Accessing the TMS Features . 65 Composing and Sending a New Text Message . 65 Sending a Quick Text Message . 67 Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features . 68 v English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page vi Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message . 68 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message . 69 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message . 69 Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message 69 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message . 69 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message . 70 Managing Text Messages . 70 Receiving a Text Message . 70 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox . 71 Replying to a Received Text Message . 71 Accessing the Drafts Folder . 72 Managing Sent Text Messages . 73 Viewing a Sent Text Message . 73 Sending a Sent Text Message . 74 Deleting a Text Message . 74 Deleting All Text Messages . 75 Secure Operations . 76 Enabling the Secure Transmission . 76 Managing Encryption . 76 Loading the Encryption Key(s) . 76 Using the Multikey Feature . 77 Selecting an Encryption Key . 77 Selecting a Keyset . 78 Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys . 78 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO s t n e t n o C vi English Conventional Only) . 79 MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page . 79 Hear Clear . 80 Security . 80 Using the Radio Lock . 80 Unlocking Your Radio . 80 Changing Your Password . 81 Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature

(Secure Radios Only) . 82 The Global Positioning System (GPS) . 82 Understanding the GPS Feature . 82 Enhancing GPS Performance . 83 Using the Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) .83 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature . 84 Saving a Waypoint . 85 Viewing a Saved Waypoint . 86 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint . 86 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint . 88 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint . 89 Deleting All Saved Waypoints . 89 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint . 90 Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode . 90 Trunking System Controls . 91 Using the Failsoft System . 91 O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page vii Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Going Out of Range . 91 SmartZone . 92 Using the Site Trunking Feature . 92 Locking and Unlocking a Site . 92 Viewing and Changing a Site . 93 Viewing the Current Site . 93 Changing the Current Site . 93 Using the Trunked Announcement . 93 Initiating an Announcement . 94 Ignition Switch Options . 94 Blank . 94 Tx Inhibit . 94 PTT Tx Inhibit . 94 Required . 95 Soft Power Off . 95 Ignition Only Power Up . 95 Emergency Power Up . 95 Auto Power Off Timer . 96 Utilities . 96 Viewing the Recent Calls List . 96 Selecting the Power Level . 97 Selecting a Radio Profile . 97 Toggling the Day or Night Display Mode . 98 Selecting the Stealth Mode . 98 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off . 98 Turning Voice Mute On or Off . 99 C o n t e n t s Using the Time-Out Timer . 99 Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features . 100 Analog Options . 100 Digital Options . 100 Using the PL Defeat Feature . 100 Using the Digital PTT ID Feature . 101 Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) . 101 Using Quick-Key Override . 102 Accessing the General Radio Information . 102 Accessing the Radio Information . 102 Viewing the IP Information . 103 Viewing the Control Assignments . 104 Using the Directional Buttons . 104 Using the Siren Control Keyapad . 105 Using the Manual Siren Button for Manual Siren Tone . 105 Using the Manual Siren Button as Siren Types Selector . 106 Using the Public Address Button . 106 Using the Response Selector . 106 Using External Alarms (Horn and Lights) . 107 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights . 107 Using Permanent Horn and Lights . 108 Changing the Selected Alarms . 108 Using the Gun Lock . 108 vii English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page viii Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Unlocking Single Gun Lock . 108 Unlocking All Gun Locks . 109 Using the Voice Announcement . 109 Using the Action Consolidation Mode . 111 Activating the Action Consolidation Activities . 111 Deactivating the Action Consolidation Activities . 112 Helpful Tips . 113 Caring for Your Radio . 113 Accessories . 114 Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range . 115 Special Channel Assignments . 115 Emergency Channel . 115 Non-Commercial Call Channel . 115 Operating Frequency Requirements . 116 Glossary . 118 Commercial Warranty . 123 s t n e t n o C viii English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page ix Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Important Safety Information Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio. C a u t i o n

ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio

(Motorola Publication part number 6881095C99) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorola.com/governmentandenterprise Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R05.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 102 to determine your radio's software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. I m p o r t a n t S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n ix English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page x Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. s t h g i r y p o C e r a w t f o S r e t u p m o C x English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 1 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Getting Started Take a moment to review the following:

How to Use This Guide . page 1 Notations Used in This Manual . page 1 Additional Performance Enhancement . page 2 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You. page 3 How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX 7500 O9 Control Head Mobile Radios. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of WARNING, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed.

W A R N I N G

C a u t i o n An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Note:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which is essential to emphasize. 1 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 2 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM The following special notations identify certain items:

Example Home button or H Phone

Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the radios display. This means Press the right side of the 4-way Navigation button. Additional Performance Enhancement The following are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality and efficiency of APX radios. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR)

DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication e.g. failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV & D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 2 English CrossTalk Prevention

This feature prevents crosstalk scenario from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the Trident Transmitting SSI clock rate in the radio to be varied from the Receiving Frequency. This subsequently reduced the possibilities of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID)

EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV & D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet

SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC OTAR feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 3 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator, if the radio is to be operated in extremely cold temperatures (less than -20 C), for the correct radio settings to ensure proper operation. You can also consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio preprogrammed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been preprogrammed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Preparing Your Radio for Use Assemble your radio by following these steps:

Turning On the Radio. page 4 Validating Compatibility During Power Up . page 5 Adjusting the Volume . page 5 Adjusting the Display Backlight . page 6 P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i 3 English If Ch mismatch appears, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. To turn off the radio, press the Power On/Off Button after the LEDs light up. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 4 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Turning On the Radio Press the Power On/Off Button briefly to power on the radio. Power On/Off button After a short time, the red, yellow and green LEDs light up. The display then shows Zone and channel text, and menu items display on the screen. The backlight will turn on to the last selected dim level. Note: Pressing the Power On/Off Button before the LED lights up will be ignored. If Fail ##/## appears in the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If Error ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Helpful Tips on page 99 for more information. i e s U r o f o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 4 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 5 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Validating Compatibility During Power Up Adjusting the Volume To increase the volume, rotate the Volume Knob clockwise. To decrease the volume, rotate the Volume Knob counterclockwise. Volume Knob The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power up. Follow the procedure below when your radio runs this task. Procedure:

1 The display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. 2 The display shows Update done Please reset upon completion. OR The display shows Update failed Please reset when it fails to update. 3 Press the Power On/Off Button to reset. The radio runs the usual power up operation if the software updates are complete. OR The radio runs the Maintenance Mode if the updates are not complete and repeat step 1. Note:

If SW incomplete appears, use Flashport Recovery Tool to update the control heads before you power on the radio again. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i 5 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 6 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Adjusting the Display Backlight You can change the intensity of the radios display backlight as needed to suite the environment conditions. Note:

The backlight setting also affects the Menu Select buttons, the Menu Navigation buttons and the keypad backlighting accordingly. Procedure:

Press and hold + on the n button to increase brightness. Release the button to stop. OR Press and hold the - on the n button to decrease brightness. Release the button to stop. Identifying Radio Controls Take a moment to review the following:

Radio Parts and Controls. page 7 Programmable Features . page 8 Assignable Radio Functions. page 8 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . page 10 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions. page 10 Using the Menu Select Buttons . page 10 Using the Navigation Buttons. page 11 Using the Keypad . page 12 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . page 12 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . page 13 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . page 14 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . page 15 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . page 16 l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 6 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 7 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Radio Parts and Controls 1 2 3 4 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Siren Control Buttons Programmable Buttons (Top) Response Selector Directional Buttons Orange Button Public Address Button Keypad Data Feature Button Mode Knob 4-Way Navigation Button Home Button Satus Icons Programmable Buttons (Bottom) Menu Select Buttons Volume Knob Display Backlight Control Buttons LED Indicators Power On/Off Button I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 7 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 8 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to a control that is preprogrammed means that the control must be programmed by a dealer or qualified radio technician using the radio's programming software, in order to assign a feature to that control. The programmable buttons can be programmed as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press:

Press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the preprogrammed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). Hold down Keeping the button pressed. Assignable Radio Functions

Action Consolidation Allows the radio to execute a specific sequence of actions that combine audio, visual and location data. E.g. Mode Change, Lightbar, Siren, Direct Status and Location Data. Bluetooth Toggles bluetooth feature off or on. Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 8 English Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Gun Lock Triggers the Gun Lock(s) to open. Information Displays the information of the radio. Internet Protocol Address Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address, device name and status of the radio. Location Determines the current location (latitude, longitude, time and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location. Or, turns the GPS functionality on or off for all location. Message Enters the current message list. Monitor (Conventional Only) Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Multiple Private Line (Conventional Only) Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel, from the scan list. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 9 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM One Touch 1 4 Launches a specific feature with one single button-press. You can setup as much as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Private Call (Trunking Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Radio Profiles Allows for easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Recent Calls Allows for easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher that you require a new encryption key. Relay Pattern Activates different lightbar patterns for different applications. Repeater Access Button (RAB) (Conventional Only) Allows to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Request-To-Talk (Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want to send a voice call. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Scan List Programming Selects the scan list for editing. Secure/Clear Toggles secure operation on or off. Selective Call (Conventional Only) Calls an assigned radio. Siren Turns different Siren Tones on or off. Site Display (Trunking Only) Displays the current site ID and RSSI value. Site Lock/Unlock Locks onto a specific site. Site Search (Trunking Only) Performs site search for AMSS

(Automatic Multiple Site Select) or SmartZone operation. Status Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct (Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup (Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Automatically registers with the server. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 9 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 10 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

Horns/Lights Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Keypad Lock Toggles the keypad lock on or off. Voice Announcement Audibly indicates the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. Voice Mute Toggles voice mute on or off. Volume Set Tone Sets the volume set tone. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:

A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons such as Top Function Programmable Button or Bottom Function Programmable Button. OR Use the Menu Select Button ( - ). Using the Menu Select Buttons

The Menu Select Buttons access the menu entries of features. Note: Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select Button ( - ) directly below Channel. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 10 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 11 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Using the Navigation Buttons

Home Button The H button returns you to the Home (default) screen. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the H button is also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. Note: Some features do not require you to press H to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. Data Feature Button

Use this button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. 4-Way Navigation Button

Use this button to scroll up, down, left or right. Press and release one of the button to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the button to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Mode Knob

Use this Mode Knob to scroll through the channels by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. Using the Top Programmable Buttons

Each Top Programmable Button has its feature name or acronym displayed on the softkey below them. The softkey indicates different status when the corresponding Top Programmable Button is pressed or activated. Solid green Indicates the feature is on. Blinking green Indicates the feature is currently busy. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 11 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 12 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The tables below show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.

Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode 14

15

16

17

18 19

20

) l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 7 9

5

4

Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

13

11

12

3

, C F I L O R V Y 2 Key 1 A 1

. B A B C D E D G H E J K F M N G P Q H T U I W X K Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. J Space L Toggle between numeric and letter mode. S Z 12 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 13 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 14

7 9

5

4

Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

13

11

12

3

, c f i l o r v y 2

. b e h k n q u x Key 1 A 1 B a C d D g E j F m G p H t I w K Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. J Space L Toggle between numeric and letter mode. s z 15

16

17

18 19 20

21

) I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 13 English 15

16

17

18 19

20

) O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 14 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

12

13

11

9

7 14

3

, 2

. 5

4

Key 1 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 G 7 H 8 I 9 K 0 J Space L Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 14 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 15 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode 3 2 B E A D Key 1 A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4 E 5 F 6 G 7 H 8 I 9 K 0 J Not applicable L Not applicable Number of Times Key is Pressed 8 10 12 13 11 9 14 5 6 7 4 C F 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 15 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 16 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button PTT Button The PTT button on the side of the microphone serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Making a Radio Call on page 33 for more information. Identifying Status Indicators Your radio indicates its operational status through the following:

Status Icons . page 17 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . page 19 Status Icons . page 19 TMS Menu Options . page 20 Call Type Icons . page 21 LED Indicator . page 22 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . page 23 Alert Tones. page 24 Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts. page 27 s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 16 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 17 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Status Icons The 480 x 272 pixel front liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The top two display rows contain color icons that indicate radio operating conditions. Selected icons are also shown on the first row of the 112 x 32 pixel top monochrome display screen of your radio. The following icons are for the front display screen unless indicated otherwise. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. F Call Received Radio has received an Individual Call. Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. O M K Direct On = Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off = Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored (during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On = The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is activated. Off = The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel is deactivated. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s H or . i Power Level L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. 17 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 18 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. View/Program Mode Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady = View mode Blinking = Program mode Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. G n o s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I k m l 18 English Location Signal On = Location feature is enabled, and location signal is available. Off = Location feature is disabled. Blinking = Location feature is enabled, but no location signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On = User is currently associated with the radio. Off = User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Lightbar Alternates between red and blue when the lightbar is on. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 19 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 64 for more information. Status Icons

The following icons appear on the radios display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Y r 3/6 Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of 6 messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 19 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 20 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode.

TMS Menu Options Menu Option Description/Function Back Clr Del Edit Exit No Optn Rply Sel Send Yes Brings you back to the previous screen. Deletes all messages. Deletes a message or text. Brings you to the edit screen. Exits to the Home screen. Returns to the previous screen. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects the highlighted command. Sends the message. Updates or saves a command. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 20 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 21 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Call Type Icons The following icons appear on the radios main display, when you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID.

Landline phone number. Landline phone number added to a Call List. U

Radio number. Radio number added to a Call List. Mobile number. Mobile number added to a Call List. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. Incoming emergency call. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 21 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 22 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Red LED Yellow LED Green LED Solid red Radio is transmitting. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow Channel is busy. Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 22 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 23 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporary changes the backlight of the display screen and the keypad, and adds a color bar to the main display screen to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Orange Emergency Alerts Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio is out of range. The radio enters failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 23 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 24 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Alert Tones An alert tone is a sound or group of sounds. Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of your radios conditions. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Tone Name Heard Short, Low-Pitched Tone Long, Low-Pitched Tone Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Time-Out Timer Timed Out When radio fails its power-up self test. When unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than 6 seconds without any activity. After time out. Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Out of Range Invalid Mode

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed.

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the system. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Busy When system is busy. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 24 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 25 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM You Hear Medium-Pitched Short, Tone Medium-Pitched Long, Tone Tone Name Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received Heard When correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. When activity on a priority channel is received. Emergency Alarm Entry When entering the emergency state. Central Echo Volume Set When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. Emergency Exit When exiting the emergency state. A Group of Medium-Pitched Tones Failsoft Automatic Call Back Talk Permit Keyfail When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request.

(When PTT button is pressed) verifying system accepting transmissions. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is received. Console Acknowledge Received Individual Call When Call Alert or Private Call is received. Call Alert Sent Site Trunking When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 25 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 26 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM You Hear Ringing Low-Pitched Gurgle Unique, Chirp Unique, High-Pitched Chirp Tone Name Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Heard When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.

(When the PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received. New Message When a new message is received. Priority Status When a priority message is received. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 26 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 27 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts The following appears on the radios display when you make and receive Phone calls. The radio also uses alert tones to indicate the current status. You Hear You See When Notes A Long Tone A Busy Tone No phone You press the PTT button and the phone system is not available. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. Phone busy The phone system is busy. Press H to exit the phone mode and try your call later. Phone busy When a channel is not available. The radio automatically connects when a channel opens. No acknowledge A High-

Pitched Tone The call is not acknowledged. Press H to hang up. The radio returns to the Home screen. When you release the PTT button. The radio indicates to the landline party that he or she may begin talking. Note: You have the option of sending additional digits (overdial), such as an extension number, or credit card or PIN numbers, to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for live overdial, every digit entered after the call is connected is sent to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for buffered overdial, the digits pressed are entered into memory and then sent when the PTT button is pressed. Press the PTT button to send either digits or voice, but not both at the same time. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 27 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 28 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM General Radio Operation Once you understand how your APX 7500 Mobile is configured, you are ready to use your radio. Use this navigation guide to familiarize yourself with the basic Call features:

Selecting a Zone . page 28 Selecting a Radio Channel . page 29 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call. page 30 Making a Radio Call . page 33 Repeater or Direct Operation . page 36 Monitoring Features . page 36 n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 28 English Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. Use the following procedure to select a zone. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Rotate the Mode knob until the display shows the desired zone. OR 1 < or > to Zone. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. 3 U or D to the required zone. OR Use the keypad to enter the zone number. 4 If the zone number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat Step 3. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to confirm the displayed zone. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 29 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/

receive frequency pairs. Use the following procedure to select a channel. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. If you select a channel that is not within the preprogrammed band, the radio indicates that it is on an unsupported frequency with both audio and visual warnings. Procedure:

Rotate the Mode knob until the display shows the desired channel. OR 1 < or > to Channel. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Channel. 3 U or D to the required channel. OR Use the keypad to enter the channel number. 4 If the channel number entered is unprogrammed, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat Step 3. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to confirm the selected channel. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 29 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 30 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. Red LED Yellow LED Green LED The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting, and solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission

(conventional mode only). There is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission in trunking mode. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 30 English Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen), depending on how your radio is preprogrammed:

1 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The display shows the caller alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 33 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 31 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. These one-to-one calls between two radios are not heard by others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

When you receive a Private Call:

1 You hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. OR Press the Call Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 During the call, the display shows the caller alias (name), if it is in the call list. OR During the call, the display shows the caller ID (number), if the callers name is not in the call list. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Press H or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Resp, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Resp, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 33 for details on making a Private Call. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 31 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 32 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

(Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Call Response button to answer a Telephone Call:

1 You hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen and the bar turns green. The display shows Phone Call and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Call Response button within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press H or the Call Response button to hang up and return to the Home screen. OR Use the Menu Select button to answer a Telephone Call:

1 You hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green. The display shows Phone call and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press H or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to hang up and return to the Home screen. See Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 35 for details on making a Telephone Call. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 32 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 33 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Making a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone switch The Mode Knob A preprogrammed One Touch Call button The Contacts list (see Viewing Details of a Contact on page 49) Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

1 > or < to TalkGrp and press the Menu Select button directly below TalkGrp. The display shows the last-selected talkgroup. Press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR Turn the Mode Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. 4 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The LED lights up solid red. 5 Speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only)

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 33 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 34 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted ID, received ID and your radio ID. 3 U or D to the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to start the Private Call. 5 The display shows Calling... <Number> or Calling...

<Alias>. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. OR If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. Making an Enhanced Private Call (Trunking Only)

This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 56 for more information. Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Enhanced Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted ID, received ID and your radio ID. 3 U or D to the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to start the Private Call. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 34 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 35 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 5 The display shows Calling... <Number> or Calling...

<Alias>. 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. OR If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. OR If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)

This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Phone. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phone. The display shows the last transmitted and received phone number. 3 U or D to the required phone number. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 4 Press and release the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. See Phone Call Display and Alert Prompts on page 27 for more information if your call is NOT answered. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 35 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 36 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Repeater or Direct Operation Monitoring Features The REPEATER operation increases the radios range by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The DIRECT or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Direct. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Direct. 3 The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. OR The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allowing only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. Monitoring a Channel

Procedure:

Lift the microphone off hook. Conventional Modes Only:

1 Listen for activity on that channel. 2 Adjust the Volume knob if necessary. 3 If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start OR Trunked Modes Only:

1 Press the PTT button. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 36 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 37 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 2 If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if you hear no tone and the t indicator lights steadily, then proceed with your message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Monitor momentarily to activate monitoring. The display shows Monitor on. 3 Release the PTT button to receive (listen). If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows Out of range. Conventional Mode Operation

This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus, you can to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from talking over someone elses conversation. Note:

This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. 3 Press the Menu Select button to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows Monitor off. Monitor on shown on the display indicates that the radio is monitoring. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Procedure:

Take the control head off hook. (This is the same as monitor on. You hear all channel traffic.) OR 1 At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, > or < button to Monitor. 37 English Advanced Call Features Calling a Phone Not in the List

1 > or < to Phone. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phone. 3 Enter the desired phone number on the keypad. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press H or Menu Select button directly below Phone to exit. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 38 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Advanced Features Use this navigation guide to learn more about advanced features available with your radio:

Advanced Call Features . page 38 Contacts . page 43 Scan Lists . page 50 Scan . page 52 Call Alert Paging . page 55 Emergency Operation . page 58 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . page 62 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . page 64 Secure Operations . page 76 Security . page 80 The Global Positioning System (GPS) . page 82 Trunking System Controls. page 91 Ignition Switch Options . page 94 Utilities. page 96 s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 38 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 39 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Receiving and Making a Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call

Procedure:

1 When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Call received. 2 The speaker unmutes. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Press H to return to the Home screen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Call, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Call, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 39. Making a Selective Call

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 U or D to the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 39 English 3 U or D to Preset for the preset preprogrammed talkgroup. OR U or D to the required talkgroup. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the corresponding talkgroup in the list. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to save the currently selected talkgroup and return to the Home screen. 5 If the encryption key associated to the new talkgroup is erased, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows Key fail. OR If the encryption key that is associated to the new talkgroup is not allowed, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows Illegal key. 6 Press H or the PTT button to exit. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 40 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen.

Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. Note: Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 76 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup

Procedure:

1 < or > to TalkGrp. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TalkGrp. The display shows the last talkgroup that was selected and stored, Select and Exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 40 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 41 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending a Status Call

This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Status button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Status. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Status. 3 The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 4 U or D to the required status. OR Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 5 Press the PTT button to send the status. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 When the dispatcher acknowledges, four tones sound and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. OR If no acknowledgment is received, a low-pitched tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press H or the PTT button.

Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note:

If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, an invalid tone sounds. 41 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 42 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Procedure:

1 When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. A gurgle tone sounds and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. 2 Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped. 3 The display shows Reprgrm rqst and Please wait. 4 If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. OR If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, a low-pitched alert tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press H to cancel and return to the Home screen. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only)

This feature lets you notify the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Rpgm. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 42 English Classifying Regrouped Radios

The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories: Select Enabled or Select Disabled. Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 43 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to 5 IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Note:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.

Note:

Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

Use the Options Menu. 1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the required subscriber alias. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 5 U or D to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 U or D to select the call type. 43 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 44 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 7 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 8 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 9 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. 10 If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. OR Use the PTT button. 1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the required subscriber alias. 4 < or > to scroll through the available IDs for the selected subscriber alias. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 44 English 6 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 7 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid yellow. 8 If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. Adding a New Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to {New Contact} and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 U or D to Name and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 5 The display shows Edit Name and a blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to enter the name. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 45 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the previous screen. 7 U or D to {Add Number} and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 8 U or D to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 9 The display shows Edit Number 1 and a blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to enter the number. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the previous screen. 11 U or D to Type 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. U or D to the required mode and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. OR Repeat Steps 8 through 10 to enter or edit the existing system IDs. OR U or D to {Add Number} and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to add a new number. Repeat Steps 8 through 10. 12 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. 45 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 46 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 13 The display shows <Entry> Stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. 14 The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 The display shows Delete <Entry> confirm?. 6 Select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen for Contacts. OR Select No to return to the main screen for Contacts. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 46 English Adding a Contact to a Call List

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to add to a call list and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Add to CallLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 U or D to the required Call List and press the Menu Select button directly below Add. OR U or D to Cancel to return to the main display for Contacts. 6 The display momentarily shows Please wait before showing <Entry> added to Call List, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. 7 The radio returns to the main display for Contacts. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 47 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Removing a Contact from a Call List

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to remove from a call list and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 The display shows Delete <Entry> confirm?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to remove the entry from the Call List. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main display for Contacts. 7 The display momentarily shows <Entry> deleted, confirming the removal of the contact from the list. 8 The radio returns to the main display for Contacts.

Editing a Contact in a Call List Editing an Entry Alias

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 U or D to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 47 English 6 A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 48 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. Editing as Entry ID

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 U or D to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 48 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 49 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Editing a Call Type

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. Viewing Details of a Contact

Procedure:

1 < or > to Cntacts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cntacts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 3 U or D to the entry you want to view and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 4 U or D to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 U or D to View and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 U or D to Type and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 6 U or D to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK to select. 7 The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. 5 The display shows all the numbers associated with the entry. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 49 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 50 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/

groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List

Procedure:

1 < or > to ScanList. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScanList. 3 U or D to view the members on the list. 4 Press H to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 50 English Editing the Scan List

This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. Procedure:

1 Long press the preprogrammed side button and proceed to Step 3. OR

< or > to ScanList. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScanList. The display shows the lists that can be changed. 3 U or D to the entry you want to edit. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Recall to view the next member of the scan list. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 51 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 5 U or D to select more channels to be added or deleted. OR Use the keypad to go directly to additional channels to be added or deleted. OR Use the Mode knob to select additional channels to be added or deleted. 6 Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 52 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status

Procedure:

1 Long press the preprogrammed side button and proceed to Step 3. OR

< or > to ScanList. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScanList. The display shows the lists that can be changed. 3 U or D to the number you want to edit. 4 Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. OR Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 U or D to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. OR Use the keypad to go directly to that scan list member. OR Use the Mode knob to select another scan list member. 6 Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. 51 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 52 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Viewing and Changing the Priority Status

Procedure:

1 Below the Select, Delete, and Recall screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Select to view and/or change the priority status of the currently displayed channel. OR Below the Select, Delete, and Recall screen, press the Select button one or more times to view and/or change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 2 A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. OR A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. OR A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. OR No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 52 English Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button, or turn the preprogrammed Scan switch to the Scan on or Scan off position, to start or stop scan. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Scan. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. 3 The display shows Scan off if scan is disabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan to enable scan. OR The display shows Scan on and the scan status icon if scan is enabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan to disable scan. 4 The radio returns to the Home screen. In the conventional system, while the radio is scanning for activity, you can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls. The respond to these types of O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 53 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM calls are similar as you usually do on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed.

Transmitting While the Scan is On Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below SCAN momentarily. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below PAGE or CALL. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing H or pressing the Menu Select button below either PAGE or CALL.

Making a Dynamic Priority Change (Conventional Scan Only) While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list

(except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. Procedure:

Using the preprogrammed button:

1 When the radio locks onto the channel designated as the new Priority-Two channel, press the preprogrammed Dynamic Priority button. 53 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 54 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 2 The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. OR Using the Menu Select button:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DynP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press H momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Deleting a Nuisance Channel

If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise

(termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Note:

Deleting a nuisance channel is only possible through the preprogrammed Nuisance Channel Delete button. This feature is not accessible through the menu. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 54 English Procedure:

Using the preprogrammed button:

1 When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, press the preprogrammed Nuisance Delete button. 2 The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. OR Using the Menu Select button:

1 When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, >

or < to NuisDel. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below NuisDel. Restoring a Nuisance Channel

Procedure:

To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and then turning it on again. OR Stop and restart a scan via the preprogrammed Scan button or menu. OR Change the channel via the Mode knob. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 55 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Hang Up (HUB)

To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box (HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. Note:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a call alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, OR when you press the PTT button. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 55 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 56 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Receiving a Call Alert Page

Procedure:

1 You hear four repeating alert tone and the green LED blinks. OR You hear one alert tone and the green LED blinks if Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled. 2 The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. 3 Press the PTT button to answer. OR Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 33 or Making a Private Call

(Trunking Only) on page 33 for more information on returning the call. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English Sending a Call Alert Page

Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Page. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Page. 3 U or D to the required ID. OR Press Cntacts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to send the page. 5 The display shows Paging... <Number>. 6 If the call alert page is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Ack received. OR O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 57 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. 7 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. 8 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to return to the main screen for Contacts. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. 3 U or D to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. 4 If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to send the call alert page. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to exit the screen without sending the call alert page. 6 The display shows Paging... <Alias>. 7 If the call alert page is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Ack received. OR A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 57 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 58 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Top (Orange) button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Only one of the Emergency modes above can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button. Note:

To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English Sending an Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone or channel. A short, medium-pitched tone sounds and the LED rapidly blinks red. OR The display shows No emergency, if the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 When you receive the dispatchers acknowledgment, the display shows Ack received. Four tones sound, the alarm ends, and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. OR If no acknowledgement is received, the display shows No acknowledge. The alarm ends and the radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 59 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only)

This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel. Note:

The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except, if enabled, it returns to one of the following:

Tactical/Non-Revert You talk on the channel you selected before you entered the emergency state. Non-Tactical/Revert You talk on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent on this same channel. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone or channel. A short, medium-pitched tone sounds and the LED blinks red. OR The display shows No emergency, if the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Emergency Call mode.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows Emergency and the current zone or channel. A short, medium-pitched tone sounds and the LED blinks red. OR The display shows No emergency, if the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 The radio enters the Emergency Call state when:

You receive the dispatchers acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. OR You press the PTT button while in the Emergency Alarm mode. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 59 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 60 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 7 Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Emergency Call mode. Turning the radio off also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to another radio without any audio or visual indicators. Upon acknowledgement, your radios microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the other radio without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. Press and release the PTT button to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode and enter regular dispatch or Emergency Call mode. Note:

For ALL Emergency signals, when changing channels:

If the new channel is also preprogrammed for Emergency, you can change channels while in Emergency operation. The emergency alarm or call continues on the new channel. If the new channel is NOT preprogrammed for Emergency, the display shows No emergency, and you hear an invalid tone until you exit the Emergency state or change to a channel preprogrammed for Emergency. 3 The silent emergency state continues until you:

Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second to exit the Silent Emergency Alarm mode. OR s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 61 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Emergency Keep-Alive Feature

This feature, when enabled, prevents the radio from being turned off via the On/Off button when the radio is in the Emergency state. Note:

The radio only exits the Emergency state using one of the ways mentioned in the previous sections. See Sending an Emergency Alarm on page 58, Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) on page 59, Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call on page 59, or Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm on page 60. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 61 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 62 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Advanced Automatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two (2) modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-Server Mode Note:

The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. Viewing the Channel which supports ARS Mode

Procedure:

1 < or > to Channel. The display shows n when the selected channel supports ARS Mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English Accessing the User Login Feature

This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example:

Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note: Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (A Z), small letters (a z), numbers (0 9), symbols (*, -, #, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight (8) characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username list may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight (8) characters or more. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 63 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Logging In as a User

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed User Login button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to User. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below User. 3 The display shows the User Login screen. 4 U or D to {ID Entry} and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. A blinking cursor appears beside Id:. Use the keypad to enter a username. OR U or D to scroll through the list of predefined usernames. Press the Menu Select button directly below Login to select the predefined username. OR Press and hold U or D to scroll through the list of predefined usernames at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Login to select the predefined username. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 5 If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. Repeat Step 4. OR A blinking cursor appears beside PIN:. Use the keypad to enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number appears as asterisks. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Login. 7 In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and In progress, with Cancel. OR In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and Logged in, with Logout and Exit. OR In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline, with Logout and Exit. 8 If the username is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows Login failed. Repeat Step 4. OR If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows Login failed. Repeat Step 6. OR 63 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 64 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to cancel the login in progress screen and return to the initial user login screen. OR Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logout and Exit. Logging Out

Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logout. 2 The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and Clear private data?. 3 Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display momentary shows Private data cleared. OR Select No to keep your private data. Note: Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Text Messaging Service (TMS) This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. There are three (3) types of text messages:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:

Inbox Compose Drafts Sent Note: See Status Icons on page 17 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 20 for more information on each menu option. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 65 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Accessing the TMS Features

Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the main menu options. Composing and Sending a New Text Message

Note: During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-

tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. During the numeric mode, except for A, pressing the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap). Procedure:

1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. 4 U or D to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to compose a new message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 65 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 66 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 5 A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options once the message is composed. 7 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 8 U or D to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR U or D to {Other Recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 66 English Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 9 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 10 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. 11 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Msg sent. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Send failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 68 for more information. You can also select the Save to Drafts option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 72 for more information. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 67 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending a Quick Text Message

Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Compose and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. 4 U or D to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Select for a predefined message. 5 U or D to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to select the required message. 6 The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 8 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 9 U or D to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR U or D to {Other Recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. 67 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 68 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 10 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 11 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. 12 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Msg sent. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Send failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 68 for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English

Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message.

Note:

Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to indicate the message as important. 3 The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 69 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to remove the priority status from the message. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to request for a reply. 3 The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message

Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to remove the priority status from the message. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s

Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Mark Important and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to indicate the message as important. AND 69 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 70 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM U or D to Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to request for a reply. 3 The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar.

Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 65 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Mark as Normal and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to indicate the message as important. AND U or D to No Req Reply and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to request for a reply. 3 The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar.

Managing Text Messages Receiving a Text Message

Note: When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send back a notification that the radio has received such message. Procedure:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox and go to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 The new message icon appears and the display momentarily shows New msg. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. 3 The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 71 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. Note: U or D to read the message if fills more than one screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Select. 4 The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. 5 U or D to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Select to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Reply, Delete, or Back to access the option. Select Reply to configure the message settings. Select Delete to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons on page 19 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message

Note:

The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

1 U or D to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Select to view the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reply to reply to a message. 3 U or D to Text Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR U or D to Quick Text and press the Menu Select button directly below Select for a predefined message. 71 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 72 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM OR U or D to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to select the required message. 4 A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. OR The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options once you have finished writing the message. 7 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to send the message. 8 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 68 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder

This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Procedure:

1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Drafts and press the Menu Select button below Select. 4 The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. 5 U or D to the required text message press the Menu Select button directly below Edit, Delete., or Back to access the option. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 73 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Function of each option:

Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Select Delete to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Select. 4 The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. 5 U or D to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Select to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Options, Delete, or Back to access the option. Select Options to configure the message settings. Select Delete to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons on page 19 for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 73 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 74 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Sending a Sent Text Message

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options while viewing the message. 2 U or D to Send Message and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 U or D to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR U or D to {Other Recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 5 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 68 for more information. Deleting a Text Message

Procedure:

From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen:

1 U or D to scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete the current message. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 75 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Deleting All Text Messages

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 U or D to Inbox and press the Menu Select button below Select to select all messages in the folder. OR U or D to Drafts and press the Menu Select button below Select to select all messages in the folder. OR U or D to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Select to select all messages in the folder. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Clear. 5 The display shows Delete All Messages Confirm?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all the messages in the selected folder. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the main TMS screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 75 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 76 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Enabling the Secure Transmission

1 > or < to Secure and press the Menu Select button directly below SEC. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 2 The display shows m, Secure on and the current key, if multi-key has been enabled. 3 Monitor the mode to be sure it is not in use. 4 Press PTT button to transmit. Note:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows Clear TX only. The radio will not transmit until you disable the secure mode. 76 English Clearing the Secure Transmission

1 > or < to Secure and press the Menu Select button directly below SEC. 2 The m disappears and the display shows Secure off.

Managing Encryption Loading the Encryption Key(s)

Note: Refer to the key-variable loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. Procedure:

1 Attach the KVL to your radio. 2 The display shows Keyloading, and all other radio functions are locked out, except for power down, and volume. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Target. 4 Press the Menu Select button below Load. 5 Press the Menu Select button below Key for single-key. OR Press the Menu Select button below Group for multikey. 6 > or < to the required key or group. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 77 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 7 Press the Menu Select button below Load to load the key to your radio. 8 When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds a short tone for single-key radios. OR When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds an alternating tone for multikey radios. Using the Multikey Feature

This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied

(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through Customer Programming Software. In addition, you can have operator-

selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-

selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If you use your radio for both conventional and trunked applications, you have to strap your encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, you may strap a different key to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-

selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key

Procedure:

1 < or > to Key. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 U or D to scroll through the encryption keys. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. 5 If the selected key is erased, a momentary keyfail tone sounds and the display shows Key fail. OR If the selected key is not allowed, a momentary illegal key tone sounds and the display shows Illegal key. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 77 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 78 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Selecting a Keyset

This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. Note: Press H, the PTT button, or the Exit menu selection, or turn the Mode knob to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Procedure:

1 < or > to KeySet. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KeySet. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. 3 U or D to scroll through the keysets. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to save the newly selected keyset. 5 Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys

This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. Procedure:

1 < or > to Erase. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Erase. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 U or D to the desired encryption key. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. The display shows the available key erase options. 5 U or D to the required option and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 At Erase all keys?, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to erase all the encryption keys in the radio OR No to return to the previous screen. OR O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 79 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM At Erase single key?, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to erase the displayed encryption key OR No to return to the previous screen. 7 Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit.

Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey (ASTRO Conventional Only) This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. Procedure:

1 < or > to Rekey. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rekey. 3 Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. OR Press the PTT button again, or the Home or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. 4 If the rekey operation fails, a bad-key tone sounds and the display shows Rekey fail. Note:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). This key must be loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page

This feature allows to view or define MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features.It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode and only for conventional communications. In additional to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgements, and Power-

up Acknowledgements. Some of the options selected may also need to be set up at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 79 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 80 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Hear Clear

There are two components of Hear Clear. 1 Companding:

Reduces the channel noise, e.g. OTA transmission, that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expander expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. 2 Random FM Noise Canceller (Flutter Fighter):

Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving in a transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are cancelled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English Security Using the Radio Lock

This feature changes your radio to a more robust security system that protects the use of the secure encryption keys. If this feature is enabled in your radio by a qualified radio technician, when you turn the radio on, the display shows Radio locked. Unlocking Your Radio

Procedure:

1 Enter your numeric password. Secure-equipped radios 6 to 8 characters. Clear radios 0 to 8 characters. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to enter the code. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to exit the feature. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 81 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 3 If the password is correct, the radio unlocks. OR If the password is incorrect, the display show Incorrect password and the radio remains locked. If you enter three incorrect passwords in a row, the display shows Deadlock. Turn the radio off and then on, and begin again at Step 1. IMPORTANT:

For Secure Radios Only After a total of 17 consecutive incorrect passwords (turning the radio off and on does not reset this number), the radio erases all of its encryption keys and shows Deadlock. See a qualified radio technician. If you forget the password, enter ******** to erase all keys and revert the password in the radio back to the default password of 01234567. Changing Your Password

Procedure:

1 < or > to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. 3 Enter the old password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK. 5 Enter the new password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 7 Re-enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select. The password is updated. OR If the two passwords do not match, repeat Steps 5 through 8. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Note:

If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. 81 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 82 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature

(Secure Radios Only) This feature allows you to enable or disable the radio lock feature. It is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Procedure:

1 < or > to LogOff. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LogOff. 3 Display shows Pswd enabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. OR Display shows Pswd disabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English The Global Positioning System (GPS) This feature uses information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your radio, expressed as latitude and longitude. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are very difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. Understanding the GPS Feature

The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites, to establish the location coordinates, maximizing your view of clear unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

In underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 83 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Note: Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 20 meters from your actual location, but sometimes further away. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note:

The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. Enhancing GPS Performance

Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, please note the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and a large amount of open sky. Using the Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)

This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 83 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 84 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. Programmable Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Waypoints Fixed location coordinates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destination coordinates are editable. Coordinates cannot be deleted. Note:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature

Note: An ON menu key may be present on the location menu if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed GPS button to toggle the Outdoor Location feature on or off. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Location. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Location. 3 The display shows Location off. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to obtain a location fix. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. U or D to Turn On GPS and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 The front display shows the latitude, longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 85 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Refresh to obtain a new location fix. 7 The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. 8 Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current latitude and longitude, along with the UTC (Zulu) time and date that the location fix was obtained. The location coordinates are updated automatically every five seconds while the location signal is present. OR If the radio fails to get a location fix, the display shows No service and returns to the previous display. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H, the PTT button (if preprogrammed), or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. The radio also exits the menu if the emergency button is pressed. Saving a Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Save As Waypnt and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. OR U or D to Save As Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Select and proceed to Step 5. OR U or D to Save As Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Select and proceed to Step 5. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 A blinking cursor appears in the Save As Waypnt screen. Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. OR 85 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 86 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. 5 The display shows Current loc saved as <Waypoint name>. OR The display shows Current loc saved as {Home}. OR The display shows Current loc saved as {Destination}. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. Viewing a Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English 4 U or D to scroll through the list. OR U or D to select a waypoint to view the location information in full. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 6 U or D to View and press the Menu Select button directly below Select to view the latitude, longitude, time and date of the selected waypoint. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. Editing the Alias of a Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 87 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 5 U or D to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. Use the keypad to edit the alias. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. Press J to add a space. Press K to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press L to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the Waypoints main screen. 8 The display shows <Waypoint name> Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the preprogrammed GPS button to return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 87 English 7 A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Location screen. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete to delete any unwanted characters. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cancel to return to the previous screen. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done with the new coordinates. 10 The display shows {Home} Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. OR The display shows {Destination} Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 88 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint

Note: Only the preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination are editable. Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to {Home} and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. OR U or D to {Destination} and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 5 U or D to Edit Location and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 The first number blinks. Press < to move to the previous number/coordinates. Press > to move back to the next number/coordinates. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to change the number/coordinates. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 89 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. Deleting All Saved Waypoints

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. U or D to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Delete. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Delete. 5 The display shows Delete <Waypoint name> Confirm?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. 7 The display momentarily shows <Waypoint name>

deleted before the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to a saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 5 U or D to Delete All and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 6 The display shows Delete All saved waypnts Confirm?. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. 8 The display momentarily shows All saved waypnts deleted before the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 89 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 90 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint

Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Options. 2 U or D to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 3 The display shows a list of waypoints. 4 U or D to the required waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 5 The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 91 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Trunking System Controls Using the Failsoft System

The failsoft System ensures continuous radio communications during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio stays at the failsoft operation and continues to transmit on current channel. User can also change to another channel although the transmission is in Failsoft System. Procedure:

1 During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. 2 A medium-pitched tone sounds every 10 seconds and the display shows Failsoft. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. Going Out of Range

When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. Procedure:

1 A low-pitched tone sounds. AND/OR The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. 2 Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until:

It locks onto a control channel. OR It locks onto a failsoft channel. OR It is turned off. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 91 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 92 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM SmartZone

The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Head the RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. Using the Site Trunking Feature

If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Site trunking. Note: When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English Locking and Unlocking a Site

This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button to toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Lock to lock the site. The display shows Site locked. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Unlock to unlock the site. The display shows Site unlocked. 4 The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 93 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Viewing and Changing a Site

This feature allows you to view the number of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. 2 The display momentarily shows the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator

(RSSI). Changing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. 2 A tone sounds and the display momentarily shows Scanning site. 3 When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Using the Trunked Announcement

The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption:

When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-Ruthless Preemption:

When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-type busy tone, followed by a call back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. 93 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 94 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Initiating an Announcement

If your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls:

Procedure:

1 Press the Mode Knob to locate the announcement-group mode. 2 Press the microphone PTT button to initiate the announcement. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English Ignition Switch Options This feature allows the user to select the radios functionality based on the Ignition State of the radio users vehicle. The available options are as follows. Blank

This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the Ignitions current state. Tx Inhibit

This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the Ignitions current state. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any Trunking dispatch communications since the radio will not affiliate with the Trunking systems. PTT Tx Inhibit

This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the Ignitions current state. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the Trunking systems. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 95 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Required

This option allows the user to power on the radio only if the Ignition is present. The radio can be powered off either through Power button press or when Ignition is lost. In addition, the radio automatically powers on when the Ignition is present only if the radio was turned off due to the ignition being removed. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Soft Power Off

This option allows the user to power on the radio either through Power button presses or when the Ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button was pressed or the Ignition was removed, the radio will be turned off. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Ignition Only Power Up

This option allows the user to power on the radio only when Ignition is detected and will power off when it is removed. The radio does not power on or off with the Power button press. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Note: While "Ignition" is not present, the radio powers-off with a radio-user Power Off button / knob selection if the radio was powered-up with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press or Ignition Auto Power Off timer is running. While "Ignition" is present, the radio powers-on with a radio-user Power On button / knob selection only if the radio was powered-down with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer. Emergency Power Up

This feature allows the user to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a footswitch. In addition, when the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit, this feature will not be available to the users. Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 95 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 96 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Auto Power Off Timer

Auto Power Off feature powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. There two different version of Auto Power Off:

Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the radio is power-on. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. Ignition Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the vehicle key is removed, when the voltage at the ignition sense is removed. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. When the vehicle key is reapplied, the voltage at the ignition is reconnected, this timer is stopped. Although both Inactivity Auto Power Off and Ignition Auto Power Off can be enabled together, Ignition Auto Power Off timer is mutually exclusive with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer when both are enabled. During the last two minutes of the timer countdown, the radio generates continuous low tone and blinks Powering Off warning on the display until the timer expires or is reset. The radio automatically powers off after the timer expires. The duration of the timer is preprogrammed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English Utilities Viewing the Recent Calls List

This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) Note:

The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Recent Calls button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Recent. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Recent to access the Recent Calls feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the list. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 97 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. OR Press H or the PTT button to return to the Home screen. If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, and the radio is left idle, the radio automatically exits the feature when the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Selecting the Power Level

You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Settings:

Select Low for a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Select High for a longer transmitting distance. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level Switch to toggle the power level between low and high. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Power. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Power. 3 The display shows Low power and the low power icon. OR The display shows High power and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile

This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, and the radio is left idle, the radio automatically exits the feature when the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Profile button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Profile. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Profile to access the Profiles feature screen. 3 U or D to scroll through the menu selections. 97 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 98 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to select the required radio profile. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. 5 The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Procedure:

Press k to enable the radios backlight, LED and tones. OR Press k to disable the radios backlight, LED and tones. Stealth Mode profile setting can also be saved during power off, and reloaded upon radio power up if preprogrammed. Toggling the Day or Night Display Mode

j allows you to toggle between Day or Night Mode. Procedure:

Press j to toggle between Day or Night Mode of the display. The last selected mode can be saved during power off and reloaded upon radio power up if preprogrammed. Selecting the Stealth Mode

k allows you to toggle Stealth Mode on or off. Pressing k disables the radios backlight, LED and tones if preprogrammed. The radio reverts back to the current profile settings once the Stealth Mode is off. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button to turn the tones off or on. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Mute. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. 3 The display momentarily shows Tones off, indicating that the keypad tones are disabled. OR The display momentarily shows Tones on, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the keypad tones are enabled. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 99 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Turning Voice Mute On or Off

You can enable and disable voice transmission as needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button to turn the feature on or off. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to VMute. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMute. 3 The display momentarily shows Voice mute off, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is disabled. OR The display momentarily shows Voice mute on, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer

This feature turns off your radios transmitter. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. Note: You will hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. Procedure:

1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LED goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 Press the PTT button to re-transmit. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 99 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 100 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Digital Options

One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Analog Options

Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Mode Carrier squelch (C) PL or DPL Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Option Result Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch (COS) Normal Squelch Selective Switch You hear any digital traffic. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature

This feature allows you to override any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed in a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. Procedure:

Remove the microphone from the hub to enable the PL Defeat feature. You hear any activity on the channel. OR The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note: When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 101 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Digital PTT ID Feature

This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. Your radios ID number is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, your radios ID is sent continuously during the voice message. Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)

Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. Three variations of smart PTT are available:

Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code Transmit Inhibit on Correct NAC Transmit Inhibit on Status Symbols Description You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or

(if secure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. You cannot transmit when the radio is in a NAC operated digital voice call channel. You cannot transmit when the radio is in a digital voice call with the last signal status bit as inbound busy or unknown. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 101 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 102 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using Quick-Key Override

As Smart PTT feature prevents your radio to transmit when the current channel is busy, you can perform a Double PTT to force a key-up and transmission to override the Smart PTT. Note: Double PTT is quick press of the PTT twice. Accessing the General Radio Information

Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Information IP Display Control Assignments Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, or when the radio is left idle and the timer expires, the radio automatically exits the feature. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.

Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following information of your radio:

Host Version Secure Version CH 1 4 Version

(depending on the number of channels connected.) Siren Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number MCHIB Version CHIB Version TIB Version URC Version Serial Number Flash Size & Type RF Band Processor Version Note: Press H at any time to return to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 103 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to Radio Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 The display shows the Information screen. 5 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Viewing the IP Information

This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to IP Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 The display shows the IP Info screen. 5 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. 103 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 104 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Viewing the Control Assignments

This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the channel currently selected. See Programmable Features on page 8 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 < or > to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Select. 4 The display shows the Control Map screen. 5 U or D to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. OR Press H to return to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English Using the Directional Buttons

The function of these buttons are only available with a Universal Relay Controller (URC). These buttons allow you to trigger the lights on the lightbar on or off. Each button is dedicated for different direction of lights. d Front Spot Light a Left Alley Light b Right Alley Light These lightbars can be customized with different lighting patterns as well. Procedure:

1 Press d, a or b to activate the required lights. 2 Press d, a or b again to deactivate the required lights. Note:

This feature can also be programmed on other programmable buttons on the O9 control head. The programmable buttons on the external tool or equipment attached to the radio, e.g. microphone, external DEK and etc, do not support this feature. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 105 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Siren Control Keyapad

These buttons allow you to activate or deactivate different types of sirens. The function of each button is shown as below. f Air horn e Manual i Wail h Yelp g HiLo Except the Air horn button, these buttons have green backlight to indicate it is activated. Procedure:

1 Press either one of the Siren Control button to activate the required siren. 2 Press the same button again to turn off the siren. OR Press either one of the button to change to another siren.

Using the Manual Siren Button for Manual Siren Tone e can be preprogrammed to trigger Manual Siren tone. The duration of the tone depends on the duration of pressing and holding the button. After the button is released, the Manual Siren Wail tone falls until the tone is mute. Procedure:

1 Press e. The Manual Siren tone sounds. 2 Release e when required. 3 The Manual Siren tone stops immediately. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 105 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 106 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM

Using the Manual Siren Button as Siren Types Selector e can also be preprogrammed as siren types selector. For example, pressing the button changes the current siren tone to another siren tone. Procedure:

When a siren tone is sounding, 1 Press e to change the siren. 2 Repeat step 1 to change to another siren. OR Press the preprogrammed siren button to turn off the siren. Using the Public Address Button

This button enables the external speaker to be able to transmit the radio user announcement publicly. Procedure:

Press c to toggle the public address feature on or off. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English Using the Response Selector

The Response Selector is mainly designed to control the lightbar. The recommended application of Response Selector for the lightbar is as below. Turn to 0 the lightbar is off. Turn to 1 the lightbar is in take down mode. Turn to 2 the lightbar is in pursuit mode without the siren. Turn to 3 the lightbar is in pursuit mode with siren enabled. Once you turn the knob to the required number, except 0, the number will have green backlight to indicate it is activated. Response Selector can also be preprogrammed to support other functions such as siren, send status update and GPS. Procedure:

1 Turn the knob to 1, 2 or 3. The radio executes the preprogrammed actions. 2 Turn to another number to change the required actions. OR Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the actions. Note:

If the Response Selector is pointing at 1, 2 or 3 during power up, the radio will execute the selected actions upon powering up. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 107 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Universal Relay Controller

The Universal Relay Controller (URC) is a versatile relay module that controls how the patterns on the Light Bar operate. The URC receives logic level input signals which are configured or conditioned by PLCs, process controllers and indicators to switch on/off a series of output signals. The URC supports up to 25 customized patterns; each pattern is a combination of 10 relays in the URC. The buttons or knob which support URC are:

Response Selector Directional Buttons Top/Bottom Programmable Buttons URC also supports Action Consolidation feature to run the lightbar. Consult a qualified radio technician for details on customizing different relay patterns using the radio's programming software. Using External Alarms (Horn and Lights)

All control heads can be equipped for external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. Note:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) alternating with the selected mode, until it is turned off. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows HORN/LITES OFF. 107 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 108 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using Permanent Horn and Lights

If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically turn on when the radio powers up. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected alarm(s). The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. Changing the Selected Alarms

Procedure:

1 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. 2 U or D to required selection. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Select to return to Home mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English Using the Gun Lock

This feature enables the radio to control from up to three gun locks. There are four configurations on the programmable buttons for this feature. Gun Lock 1 triggers first gun lock to open Gun Lock 2 triggers second gun lock to open Gun Lock 3 triggers third gun lock to open All Gun Locks triggers all gun locks to open concurrently but close in a sequence with a few seconds of difference in between. Due to security purposes, there are neither any text nor icon are displayed for this feature. Unlocking Single Gun Lock

Procedure:

With relock timer:

1 Press the required preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. The required Gun Lock opens. 2 Place your gun on the Gun Lock. OR Remove your gun from the Gun Lock. 3 The lock closes when the timer expires. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 109 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM OR Without relock timer, or the relock timer is set to zero:

1 Press and hold the required preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. The required Gun Lock opens. 2 Place the required gun on the Gun Lock. OR Remove the required gun from the Gun Lock. OR Without relock timer:

1 Press and hold the preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. All the Gun Locks open. 2 Place the required guns on the Gun Locks. OR Remove the required guns from the Gun Locks. 3 Release the required preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. The Gun Lock closes. 3 Release the preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. All the Gun Locks close. Unlocking All Gun Locks

Procedure:

With relock timer:

1 Press the preprogrammed Gun Lock Button. All the Gun Locks open concurrently. 2 Place your guns on the Gun Locks in the sequence from Gun Lock 1 to Gun Lock 3. OR Remove your guns from the Gun Locks in the sequence from Gun Lock 1 to Gun Lock 3. 3 The locks close when the timer for each lock expires. The locks are arranged in the sequence from Gun Lock 1 to Gun Lock 3. Using the Voice Announcement

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Each voice announcement is within a limit of three seconds maximum. The sum total duration for all voice announcements in a radio shall be no more than 1000 seconds. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 109 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 110 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM The features which Voice Announcement supports are:

Zone Channel Scan Monitor Talkaround/Direct Tx Inhibit Note: Voice announcements support certain number of zone-

channel, but not all. Seek advice from your dealer or qualified technician for the best selections for this feature. The two options of priority for the Voice Announcement available are:

High enables the voice of the feature to announce even when the radio is receiving calls. Low disables the voice of the feature from announcing when the radio is receiving calls. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English Procedure:

You hear a voice announcement when the features below are preprogrammed in the radio. The radio powers up. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Press the preprogrammed voice announcement button

(which specifically programmed to playback the current zone and channel). The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Note: Pressing this preprogrammed playback button will always enable the voice feature to announce in High priority. All the three programmable buttons at the side of the radio support this feature. Change to a new zone. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Change to a new channel within the current zone. The radio announces the current channel. Press either the Menu Select button or preprogrammed button of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, Monitor, Talkaround/Direct or Transmit Inhibit. The radio announces the corresponding feature activation or deactivation. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 111 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Using the Action Consolidation Mode

This feature allows the radio to execute a series of actions by pressing a preprogrammed button or by turning the Response Selector. Features allowed for Action Consolidation are as below. Activates the lightbar with patterns Activates the siren Switches to predefined zone or channel for Talkaround or Direct Mode Sends a status update to dispatch for Talkaround or Direct Mode Sends a GPS report Except Group Call, all other activities are blocked during Action Consolidation. Note:

These feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. Action for either Siren, Lightbar or Gunlock can only be activated one at a time in Action Consolidation mode. Activating the Action Consolidation Activities

Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed button of Action Consolidation. The display shows the activities of the required programs run by the radio. Top Programmable Buttons Only:

The LCD label flashes to indicate the feature is active. 2 The radio reverts back to normal when Action Consolidation activities are complete. OR The display shows Action Consolidation Failed. The Failed Actions screen appears. The screen shows a list of actions that failed to run. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 111 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 112 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Deactivating the Action Consolidation Activities

When the radio is running activities of the Action Consolidation, the following interruptions shall end the Action Consolidation activities. Procedure:

Press H. The display shows Action Consolidation Cancelled. The radio ends the transmission and reverts to Home mode. OR Press PTT button to transmit. The display shows Action Consolidation Cancelled. The radio ends the transmission and reverts to Home mode. OR Press Emergency button or received an Emergency message. The display shows Action Consolidation Cancelled. The radio ends the transmission and reverts to Home mode and launch emergency. The Siren and Lightbar activities run by Action Consolidation are not deactivated in step 2, but continue until they are completely or manually disabled. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 113 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Helpful Tips Take a moment to review the following:

Caring for Your Radio . page 113 Caring for Your Radio The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems.

C a u t i o n The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. l H e p f u l i T p s 113 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 114 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Accessories For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorola.com/governmentandenterprise On the website, search for APX 7500 Multi-Band Mobile Radio. You will see the accessories information besides the specifications of the radio. You can also contact your dealer for details. s e i r o s s e c c A 114 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 115 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Take a moment to review the following:

Special Channel Assignments. page 115 Operating Frequency Requirements . page 116 Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel

If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 2 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. 3 4 State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination State the nature of the distress. Specify what kind of assistance you need. State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 5 6 7 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. OVER. 9 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel

For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. A p p e n d i x

M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 115 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 116 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Operating Frequency Requirements Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M i

x d n e p p A A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note: Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.050 156.100 Receive 160.650 160.700 Channel Number 1 2 116 English Channel Number

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

18 19 20

22 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 Receive 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 117 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) Channel Number

24 25 26 27 28 60

62 63

65 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725 Receive 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725 Channel Number Frequency (MHz) Transmit Receive 75 76 77**

78 79 80

84 85 86 87 88

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only

*** Guard band Note: A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. A p p e n d i x

M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 117 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 118 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. Term Definition ACK Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. Acknowledgment of communication. Analog Signal ARS ASTRO 25 Trunking ASTRO Conventional Autoscan Call Alert An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Automatic Registration Service Motorola standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola standard for wireless digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Privately page an individual by sending an audible tone. y r a s s o G l 118 English Term Definition Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting

(turning on) a receivers audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics such as transmit/

receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-

way/data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater (see Trunking). A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Carrier Squelch Central Controller Channel Control Channel Conventional Conventional Scan List O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 119 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Term Definition Term Definition Cursor CP Deadlock DEK Digital Private Line (DPL) Digital Signal Dispatcher DSP Dynamic Regrouping ESN A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. Codeplug Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio.The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. Direct Entry Keypad or Keyboard A type of coded squelch using data bursts. Similar to PL except a digital code is used instead of a tone. An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio system management duties. Digital Signal Processing A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Electrical Serial Number l G o s s a r y A feature that allows communications to take place even though the central controller has failed. Each trunked repeater in the system transmits a data word informing every radio that the system has gone into failsoft. Federal Communications Commission. Frequency Modulation Disconnect. The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Key-variable loader: A device for loading encryption keys into the radio. Liquid crystal display Light-emitting diode A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display selection of these features is controlled by the - button. Millennium Conrol Head Board Failsoft FCC FM Hang Up Home screen KVL LCD LED Menu Entry MCHB 119 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 120 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Term Definition Term Definition Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. A scan list that can include both talkgroups

(trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. The user talks on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Over-the-air rekeying A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. A set of unique features specific to a radio. Personal Identification Number. Monitor Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List Network Access Code Non-Tactical/

Revert OTAR Page Personality PIN y r a s s o G l 120 English Preprogrammed Refers to a software feature that has been Private

(Conversation) Call Private Line

(PL) Programmable PTT Radio Frequency (RF) Repeater activated by a qualified radio technician. A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the talkgroup. A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Refers to a radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-To-Talk the PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit (send) operation when pressed. The part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). A conventional radio feature, where you talk through a receive/transmit facility that re-transmits received signals, in order to improve communications range and coverage. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 121 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Term Definition Term Definition Selective Call Selective Switch Squelch Standby Status Calls Tactical/

Non-Revert Talkaround A feature that allows you to call a select individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Special electronic circuitry, added to the receiver of a radio, that reduces, or cuts off, unwanted signals before they are heard in the speaker. An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. The user talks on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. Bypass a repeater and talk directly to another unit for easy local unit-to-unit communications. Talkgroup TMS Trunking Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List USK UTC An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communication path. Text Messaging Service The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users

(see Conventional). A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Unique Shadow Key Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard (formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich

(up to 180 degrees) is later in time;

everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym =

Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. l G o s s a r y 121 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 122 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Term Definition Zone A grouping of channels. y r a s s o G l 122 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 123 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Commercial Warranty Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX 7500 Mobile Units Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y 123 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 124 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. C)Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

A) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. B) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C 124 English D)Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F) Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G)Rechargeable batteries if:

(1) any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.

(2) the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H)Freight costs to the repair depot. I) A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J) Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K) Normal and customary wear and tear. O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 125 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A) that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

B) that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C)should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y 125 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 126 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Notes s e t o N 126 English O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 1 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM O9Head_68007024014_b.book Page 2 Wednesday, October 20, 2010 2:28 PM Motorola, Inc. 1301, E. Algonquin Rd. Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. 2010 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. October 2010.

*68007024014*

68007024014-B

 

 

Chapter 5 Motorcycle Radio Installation NOTE: The motorcycle radio installation is not applicable for 100W radios and O9 control heads. 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description The motorcycle model includes all the same components in the standard radio, with the exceptions listed in the model charts in the APX 7500 Basic Service Manual (6875964M01). The following paragraphs describe the unique items provided with the motorcycle models. NOTE: The APX 7500 Basic Service Manual (6875964M01) includes complete parts lists and parts numbers for all parts shown in the exploded views in this chapter.

A small label is included with the motorcycle radio, which can be placed on the radio to identify it as a motorcycle radio. The label should be placed on a flat and protected area to avoid damage during handling. See Figure 5-1. Figure 5-1. Identification of a Motorcycle Radio by Using a Label 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure The transceiver is mounted in the weather-resistant enclosure that consists of a bottom housing and a hinged top cover. The top cover has a locking latch that requires a key to open. The enclosure is mounted above the rear motorcycle wheel, oriented so that the lock is forward and the hinged cover opens toward the rear of the motorcycle. The bottom housing has a grommeted hole for cable entry and weep holes to permit water drainage. The enclosure is mounted on the motorcycle with a universal mounting plate and shock and vibration isolators. A large, braided ground-strap (installed between the mounting plate bolts and the motorcycle frame) grounds the transceiver. 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit All radio functions, except push-to-talk (PTT), are activated from the control head, which also is weather-resistant. The control head and the external speaker are mounted for easy access near the center of the handlebars. The control head is positioned for unobstructed viewing, and it may be tilted on the horizontal axis for ease of viewing. The microphone cable port on the front of the control head is plugged and is not used. 5-2 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Motorcycle Radio Description 5.1.3 Control Head Cable The control-head cable connects the control head to the transceiver. The cable is routed along the motorcycles frame and has weather-resistant connections at both ends. Excess cable is coiled under the transceiver inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Each end of the cable is strain-relieved with jackscrews at the control head and the transceiver.

The cable is shielded to reduce the effects of radio frequency interference and ignition sense noise. 5.1.4 Microphone A weather-resistant, palm microphone and coiled cord plug into a pigtail connector on the control cable. The microphone attaches to a hang-up bracket located within easy reach of the motorcycle rider. The coiled cord is long enough to be operated by someone standing next to the motorcycle, yet short enough to not interfere with the motorcycles steering or operation. 5.1.5 Keypad Mic The Mobile Keypad Microphone (Mic) is a full keypad handheld microphone. The keypad on this microphone is intended to assist in navigating through the menus on its parent device, as well as entering information such as phone numbers and menu picks. 5.1.6 External Speaker A 3.2-ohm, 10-watt-rated-audio-power, external speaker is mounted on the front of the motorcycle. The speaker cable is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceivers rear accessory connector. A sealed, weather-resistant, speaker-muting (toggle) switch is mounted on top of the speaker. The external speaker connects to the rear accessory connector of the transceiver. 5.1.7 Headset Capability The motorcycle radio is compatible with headset accessories that would provide hands-free operation of the radio. Motorola does not manufacture headset equipment, but provides the interconnection for headset equipment with the motorcycle radio. Aftermarket headset equipment is available through Motorola (see Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering).

C a u t i o n To avoid possible injury to hearing, the audio setting in the mobile radio MUST be confirmed, if the Motorola mobile radio is used with any motorcycle helmet headset. See CPS Help for details. 5.1.8 Antenna 5.1.9 The antenna(s) are mounted on top of the transceivers weather-resistant enclosure. 

The enclosures metal lining acts as the antennas ground plane. Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire The ignition sense wire connects to the motorcycles fuse box and is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceivers rear accessory connector. The radio is wired so that transmission is inhibited if the motorcycles ignition sense switch is off. 

If the PTT switch is pressed with the ignition sense off, a low-frequency tone sounds. The receiver is controlled by the control head on/off switch. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installation Overview 5-3 Installation Overview 5.2 5.2.1 General All APX 7500 radios are tested and inspected before shipment. It is, however, suggested that the transmitter frequency, deviation, and power output be checked at the time of installation. It is the license holders responsibility to ensure that the operating parameters of his station comply with applicable laws governing radio communications equipment. For tests and alignment procedures, refer to the appropriate service manual (refer to Related Publications on page vi). Generally, the installation of the motorcycle radio takes place in the following parts:

Mounting the universal mounting plate and related hardware at the rear of the motorcycle;

Mounting the control head, speaker, microphone, and related hardware forward on the motorcycle;

Routing the power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable to the weather-resistant enclosure;

Mounting the weather-resistant enclosure and radio chassis, and connecting the cables;

Mounting the antenna(s) to the weather-resistant enclosure. A universal mounting plate, supplied by Motorola, is first mounted to either a motorcycle carrier at the rear of the motorcycle or to the rear frame of the motorcycle itself. The mounting procedures for the universal mounting plate vary from motorcycle to motorcycle. Therefore, the procedures given in this manual for installing the mounting plate may not specifically apply, but are provided for guidance. The control head, speaker, and microphone are mounted forward on the motorcycle, on or near the steering column. There are several possible mounting configurations which use a combination of Motorola and customer-built brackets. These configurations are outlined in this manual. Because of the large number of motorcycle makes and models in existence, the customer-built brackets are necessary to tailor the mounting of the Motorola equipment to the particular motorcycle being used. Suggestions for customer-built brackets are given in this manual. The power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable are routed to the weather-resistant enclosure position. The enclosure and the radio chassis are then mounted. Special care is required when connecting cables to the radio equipment within the enclosure. 6878215A01 5-4 5.2.2 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installation Overview Important Installation Hints Consider the following when mounting the radio components:

Excess lengths of control-head, power, ignition sense, and speaker cables must be routed in the enclosure as shown in Figure 5-15. All components must be mounted securely in order to withstand the constant and sometimes severe vibration experienced on a motorcycle. No cantilever action, which could cause severe vibration, should be generated in the mounting hardware. The control head and microphone must be placed for ease of accessibility by the motorcycle operator. Forward components (control head, microphone, and speaker) should not interfere with visual or physical access to controls and instruments. Forward components should not interfere with the handling of the motorcycle. Cabling between the control head and the radio chassis should be run to minimize interference with operator movements. The weather-resistant enclosure should be placed to avoid any interference with the motorcycle operator. Electrical continuity must be present through the enclosure shock mounts to the motorcycle frame for proper electrical and RF grounding. The antenna(s) are designed for mounting on the top of the weather-resistant enclosure. Only the supplied microphone mounting clip should be used to ensure secure mounting of the microphone. This clip has a very strong spring to ensure positive retention of the microphone over rough terrain. Also, there must be electrical continuity from this clip to the motorcycle frame for DC grounding. Direct access to the microphone should be provided from both sides of the motorcycle. Sufficient slack in the microphone coiled cord should be allowed so as not to impede steering. Mounting hardware must be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, ensure that the added capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installation Overview 5-5 5.2.3 Parts Identification The following installation procedures refer to Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-16. Detailed descriptions of the mounting hardware used in each procedure are provided in parts lists located in the exploded views located in the APX 7500 Basic Service Manual (Motorola publication part number 6881096C73). Those parts supplied by Motorola are contained in one of the following kits:

Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Microphone Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Speaker with Mute Switch Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Speaker with Keypad Mic Motorcycle Hardware Kit SECURENET or Motorcycle Hardware Kit Motorcycle Power Cable Kit Motorcycle Mounting Kit Weather-Resistant Enclosure (Black) Antenna 5.2.4 Order of Installation Before starting the installation, familiarize yourself with the mounting hardware (see Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-16). Perform the installation procedures in the order that follows. Install the universal mounting plate on the motorcycle. Install the control head and speaker. Install the microphone hang-up clip. Install antenna base and cable onto enclosure. Install the cables. Install the weather-resistant enclosure on the universal mounting plate. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Route the cables inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure. 8. 9. Install the antenna(s) on the enclosure. 6878215A01 5-6 5.3 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Universal Mounting Plate Installing the Universal Mounting Plate The universal mounting plate, supplied with the motorcycle radio, must be mounted on the motorcycle first. It provides the base on which the weather-resistant enclosure is to be mounted. 

The method used for mounting the plate depends on the make and model of the motorcycle and whether the plate is mounted to a carrier or to the motorcycle chassis. After the plate has been securely mounted to the motorcycle, mounting the weather-resistant enclosure onto the plate is straightforward. Figure 5-2 illustrates the universal mounting plate mounted to a motorcycle carrier. Since there are so many makes and models of motorcycles and motorcycle carriers, it is impossible to give specific step-by-step instructions for mounting the universal mounting plate. However, noting the following considerations will aid in the installation procedure. A minimum of holes are predrilled into this plate as supplied. Mounting holes must be drilled as required for the particular motorcycle on which the plate is being mounted. The universal mounting plate should be mounted on the motorcycle in such a manner that the later mounting of the weather-resistant enclosure will not interfere with the motorcycle seat back, with any other obstacles, or with the motorcycle operator. The enclosure may be temporarily bolted to the universal mounting plate and the unit positioned on the motorcycle to ensure the above criteria are met. To ensure a good grounding path from the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle carrier or frame, stainless steel lock washers must be used with the mounting hardware in two areas to score through the paint on the universal mounting plate and on the carrier or frame, thereby, providing good electrical contact with the underside of the motorcycle carrier or motorcycle frame. Figure 5-2. Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) Follow the procedures below to mount the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle 

(see Figure 5-2). 1. Determine the mounting position for the mounting plate. 2. Determine whether stainless steel spacers are required for clearance in mounting the plate. 3. Drill four 9/32-inch holes in the mounting plate and the corresponding motorcycle carrier or chassis for mounting the plate. 4. Attach the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle using four machine screws, eight lock washers, and four nuts. Tighten screws securely. The lock washers must cut through the paint on the plate and motorcycle carrier or frame to ensure a good ground path. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-7 5.4 Installing the Speaker and Control Head The control head mounting location and configuration is determined largely by the make and model of motorcycle. Two different mounting configurations are described below. One involves mounting the speaker and control head together as a unit using the combination speaker/control-head bracket

(shown in Figure 5-4) supplied by Motorola. Alternately, the control head may be mounted by itself using a smaller control-head bracket supplied by Motorola. In this case, the speaker is mounted elsewhere. This section outlines installation procedures for each configuration mentioned above. The customer (or installer) is in the best position to determine the most appropriate mounting configuration for the control head and speaker based on the particular motorcycle on which the equipment is to be mounted.

C a u t i o n When determining its location, position the control head so that it is clearly visible and within easy reach of the motorcycle operator. Figure 5-3. Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01) 6878215A01 5-8 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Figure 5-4 illustrates the combination speaker/control head bracket. This combination bracket is used only when the control head and speaker are to be mounted as a unit. Also illustrated in Figure 5-4 is a handlebar-mounting bracket which may be required if the combination speaker/

control-head bracket cannot be easily mounted to the motorcycle. In this case the 

handlebar-mounting bracket is mounted to the motorcycle, and the combination bracket is then mounted to the handlebar-mounting bracket. Figure 5-4. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-9 Provision has been made on the combination speaker/control-head bracket for mounting the microphone hang-up clip. If that mounting is desired, the hang-up clip must be attached to the bracket before installing the control head and speaker. See Section 5.6: Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip on page 5-14 for the hang-up clip procedure. Install the speaker and control head as described below. 1. Determine the location where the speaker/control head is to be mounted. Consider how the speaker/control-head bracket may be mounted, and whether or not a handlebar-mounting bracket is needed. Take care to select a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. NOTE: The angle at which the handlebar-mounting bracket or the speaker/control-head bracket is mounted to the motorcycle determines the firing angle of the speaker. If the handlebar-mounting bracket is needed, install it first. 2. 3. Mount the speaker/control-head bracket, either directly to the motorcycle, or, if used, to the handlebar-mounting bracket, using four stainless-steel machine screws, lock washers, and nuts. 4. Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the speaker/control head bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 5. Mount the speaker on the speaker/control-head bracket, using two machine screws and lock washers. Torque these screws to 20 in-lbs. 6. Attach the control-head cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. This connection must be made before you mount the control head in the bracket.

(Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 7. Mount the control head to the bracket, using two machine screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 8. Adjust the control head viewing angle by loosening its mounting screws and rotating the control head to the desired angle. Then, retighten screws to 20 in-lbs torque. This concludes the speaker/control-head installation. 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Some motorcycles provide a console for mounting radio equipment. This console is attached to the top of the fuel tank. With the use of a mounting bracket, screws, nuts, and lock washers, the combination speaker/control-head bracket can be mounted to this console. Figure 5-5 illustrates this type of mounting. The console attachment screws must be removed, and the console must be lifted slightly from the fuel tank to gain access in order to attach mounting hardware, and to route cables later. In this installation, the microphone (mic), mic hang-up bracket, and mic extension bracket will interfere with handlebar travel. Installation using this method is the same as in Section 5.4.1: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 5-8. 6878215A01 5-10 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Speaker and Control Head Figure 5-5. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together f 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-11 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately It may be necessary to use the smaller control head bracket (part number 07-80127N02) and mount the speaker and microphone hang-up clip in another location on the motorcycle. Before installing the control head using the bracket described above, the control-head end of the control-head cable should be temporarily fastened to the control head, and the control head fastened to its bracket. Motorola-supplied spacers and the mic-cable bracket are required to mount the control head to the handlebar. This mic-cable bracket has holes to mount the microphone-cable connector. Follow these procedures when mounting the smaller control-head bracket:

1. Determine the location at which the control head is to be mounted. Take care to choose a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. 2. Securely mount the Motorola-supplied spacers, mic-cable bracket, and small control-head bracket to the handlebars. 3. Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the mic-cable bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 4. Attach the control-head end of the cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. 5. Mount the control head to the small control-head bracket, at the proper viewing angle, using two wing screws. Tighten firmly. This concludes the control-head installation. 6878215A01 5-12 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Speaker and Control Head Figure 5-6. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately The control head may be mounted to the fuel tank console using the smaller control-head bracket and spacers/hardware. In this configuration, the microphone cable connector may be attached directly to the console, eliminating the need for a custom bracket. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-13 Figure 5-7. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately Installation is the same as detailed in Section 5.4.2: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 5-9 and Section 5.4.3: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately on page 5-11. 6878215A01 5-14 5.5 5.6 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Speaker Installing the Speaker Use the following procedure when the speaker is mounted separate from the control head. The speaker bracket supplied with the speaker may be used alone if a suitable location can be found, or if necessary, a customer-supplied bracket may be fabricated for mounting the speaker. 1. Determine the location in which the speaker is to be mounted and whether there is a requirement for a customer-supplied bracket. 2. Fabricate a bracket if required. Use the Motorola-supplied speaker bracket as a template for drilling mounting holes. Also drill holes in the fabricated bracket for mounting to the motorcycle. 3. Mount the fabricated bracket to the motorcycle chassis. 4. Mount the Motorola-supplied bracket to the fabricated bracket using two machine screws, flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. 5. Mount the speaker to the speaker bracket using two wing screws. Directions for speaker cable routing appear later in this section. Speaker mounting is now complete. Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip Install the hang-up clip either on the supplied microphone extension bracket or on the side of the speaker/control head bracket. Both methods are shown in Figure 5-4. Determine the mounting location and install as described in the following paragraphs. NOTE: Wherever the hang-up clip is mounted, it must be DC grounded for proper operation. After mounting the clip, be sure there is electrical continuity between the clip and the motorcycle chassis. 5.6.1 Extension Bracket Mounting Using this method, you can mount the clip so that it faces the operator. 1. Attach the bracket to the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, four lock washers, and two nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. 2. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 3. Fasten the hang-up clip to the extension bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. 4. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting Attach the hang-up clip to the left side of the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs. torque. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing Antenna Base and Cables 5-15 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting To mount the microphone hang-up clip in another location, a customer-supplied bracket may be used. Suggested locations include the handlebars, fuel-tank console, or any location which provides easy access to the microphone without blocking controls and indicators and without interfering with motorcycle handling. See Figure 5-5, Figure 5-6, and Figure 5-7 for alternative microphone hang-up clip mounting methods. 1. Fabricate a bracket, then secure it to the motorcycle. 2. Use two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts to secure the hang-up clip to the customer-

supplied bracket. Ensure that the microphone clip is DC grounded to the motorcycle chassis

(a grounding lug and strap are provided in the hang-up clip kit for this purpose) this is essential for proper radio operation. 5.7 Installing Antenna Base and Cables NOTE: Antenna hole placement and cable routing in 7/800, VHF and UHF antenna manuals are not applicable for the APX Series.

The GPS antenna assembly must be done after the removal of the metal liner but before reinstalling the APX Series liner. 1. Open the top cover of the weather-resistant enclosure. 2. Uninstall the metal liner that is shipped attached to the weather-resistant enclosure. This liner has one depressed area at the top of the enclosure liner just toward the rear of the enclosure. This metal liner is not used with APX Series products. 3. Place the metal liner with two round, depressed areas toward the enclosure hinge and 5/8 hole near the front of the housing, inside the top cover, and align the six slots in the metal liner with the screw holes in the top housing. 4. The metal liner of the enclosures top cover acts as a ground plane for the antenna. 5. Locate the two round, depressed areas about 3 inches in diameter in the metal liner near the enclosure hinge. Referring to Figure 5-8, these areas are either Band 1 or Band 2 depending on the antenna port they align to. Refer to band markings on radio for the proper antenna port location. For the GPS antenna, use the 5/8 hole near the front of the housing near the lock. Top Cover for APX Radios Band 1 Antenna Port Band 2 Antenna Port Band 1 Antenna GPS Band 2 Antenna Figure 5-8. Location of Band 1 or Band 2 (Depending on the Antenna Port They Align to) 6878215A01 5-16 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing Antenna Base and Cables 6. These holes in the metal liner is used as a template to mark the position of the hole(s) to be drilled at the top cover. Follow the below guidelines for the various options.

- Single Band Refer to your APX radio (see Figure 5-9) and see if your single band antenna is in the position of Band 1 or 2. Depending on which location your antenna port is mark a hole in the appropriate antenna position only. Refer to Figure 5-8.

- Dual Band Mark a hole in both the Band 1 and Band 2 Antenna position as seen on Figure 5-8.

- GPS Mark a hole in the GPS Antenna position as seen on Figure 5-8. Antenna Band Label Band 2 Antenna Port Band 1 Antenna Port GPS Antenna Port Figure 5-9. Antenna Band Identification 7. Remove the metal liner from the top cover. 8. For Band 1 and Band 2 positions, use the Motorola RPX-4378A Hole-Cutting Saw or equivalent, and carefully drill a 3/4-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. For the GPS carefully drill a 9/16-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. The saw should clean a neat circle to assure good contact between the antenna and the housing. IMPORTANT:

For proper seating of the antennas, deburr and scrape any foreign matter from both sides of the hole, being careful not to mar the finish of the shell. 9. Clean the mounting surface around the hole to remove dirt and wax. 10. Refer to the Motorcycle GPS Instruction Manual for further installation instruction for the GPS. GPS must be mounted before the APX metal liner is installed. 11. Reinstall the APX metal liner (see Figure 5-8) with the cable clamps provided in the weather-

resistant housing. If installing GPS, the GPS coaxial cable must be fed through the hole in the APX metal liner before the liner can be placed onto the housing. Then route the GPS Coaxial Cable through the cable clamps before tightening the hex screws as installing the cable after that is difficult due to the connector. See Figure 5-10 for GPS Cable Routing. Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Figure 5-10. Routing the Coaxial Cable for GPS Connector 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing Antenna Base and Cables 5-17 12. Attach the 7/800, VHF or UHF antenna base per Antenna Installation Manual. IMPORTANT:

Antenna Placement and Cable Routing in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX series. 13. Route the coaxial cable for the 7/800, VHF or UHF antenna(s) through the cable clamps per Figure 5-11 for Band 1 and Figure 5-12 for Band 2.

C a u t i o n Be sure to observe the correct routing of the antenna cable. Failure to do so can damage the cable. Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Attach to Antenna Connector on Radio Band 1 Figure 5-11. Routing the Coaxial Cable for Band 1 Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Attach to Antenna Connector on Radio Band 2 Figure 5-12. Routing the Coaxial Cable for Band 2 14. After routing cable, allow enough of the cable to reach the radios antenna connector and cut off any excess length of the cable. 15. Install the connector per Antenna Installation Manual. 6878215A01 5-18 5.8 5.9 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Antenna Installing the Antenna IMPORTANT:

Antenna Placement and Cable Routing as described inside the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX radio series. Refer to information listed below. Connect the appropriate antenna connectors to the antenna receptacles on the radio. Tighten the coupling until fully engaged. Cable Routing Five cables must be installed to interconnect the components of the radio system as shown in Figure 5-13. The antenna cable is routed away from the other cables inside the enclosures hinged cover (see Section 5.7 on page 5-15). The four remaining cables, routed along the motorcycle frame, are described in the following paragraphs. NOTE: Antenna Hole Placement and Cable Routing information in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable to the APX series.

Removal of the fuel tank and seat from the motorcycle will facilitate routing the cables along the frame. Motorcycles with consoles attached to fuel tanks require routing cables between console and fuel tank. In this case the tank is not removed. CONTROL HEAD CABLE SPEAKER/

CONTROL HEAD SPEAKER CABLE MICROPHONE CONTROL HEAD CABLE ACCESSORY CABLE POWER CABLE ANTENNA CABLE BATTERY FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE SPEAKER CABLE CHASSIS GROUND FUSED POWER CABLE Figure 5-13. Cable Routing 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Cable Routing 5-19 1. Speaker Cable runs from the speaker to the accessory-cable connector inside the weather-resistant enclosure. 2. Control Cable runs from the rear of the control head to the front of the transceiver inside the enclosure. Ignition Sense (Red) Wire Portion of Accessory Cable runs from the ignition sense fuse terminal of the fuse box to the rear area inside the enclosure. The lug for attaching the ignition sense wire is contained on the accessory cable. 3. 4. Power Cable The red, unterminated end runs from the positive terminal of the battery to the power connector that plugs in the rear of the transceiver. Lugs for attaching the red and black leads are contained in the motorcycle power-cable kit. The black, unterminated end runs from a suitable motorcycle chassis ground to the power connector. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the negative battery post. You may route the cables in any order. As you route each cable, temporarily fasten it at both ends. When all cables have been run, permanently fasten the cables with appropriate cable tie wraps. Observe the following during routing and hook-up:

1. Route the cables so that none interfere with motorcycle operation. 2. Fasten the cables with supplied nylon tie wraps. The wraps should be firmly installed at frequent intervals along the cable length in such a manner that motorcycle vibration will not cause metal fatigue and subsequent breakage of the cable wires. 3. Take care to position cables away from parts of the motorcycle that get hot. Bundle excess cable length inside the weather-resistant enclosure as discussed later in Section 5.11: Transceiver and Cabling Installation on page 5-21. The fifth cable is the microphone with coiled cord. Plug the 9-pin D-connector end of the coiled cord into its mating connector, which was attached near the control head discussed in an earlier paragraph. Tighten the coiled-cord-retention screws. Insert the S-hook strain relief (terminated to the coiled cord) into the hole in the mounting bracket. Slide the microphone into the microphone hang-up bracket. 6878215A01 5-20 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure 7 7 2 3 4 8 5 6 1 Item No. Description Item No. TO MOTORCYCLE CHASSIS GROUND Description 1 2 3 4 Universal Mounting Plate Machine Screw Lockwasher Flat Washer 5 6 7 8 Flat Rubber Washer Shouldered Rubber Washer 7-1/2-inch Ground Strap Ground Strap Figure 5-14. Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation 1. Remove the radio-mounting plate by removing four screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 2. The weather-resistant enclosure is mounted to the universal mounting plate using shock mounts. Assemble the shock-mount components exactly as shown in Figure 5-14. Be sure to install ground straps between the shock-mount and the transceiver trunnion mount, and install one 7-1/2-inch ground strap between the right rear mount and the enclosure lids antenna ground plane 0 (shown in Figure 5-14 and in Figure 5-16). 3. The order of assembly is important to ensure proper shock mount operation. All components are supplied with the mounting kit. The five 7- 1/2-inch straps are used on the rear and front shock mounts four from shock mount to trunnion, and one from the shock mount to the lids antenna ground plane. NOTE: Grounding through the power-supply cable is NOT sufficient. Whether the radio transceiver is mounted to a carrier or the chassis itself, the transceiver MUST be properly grounded to the motorcycle chassis. The ground strap supplied with the installation kit may have to be used to ensure a good RF ground path from the radio transceiver to the motorcycle chassis. Install the 3-foot ground strap on one of the front shock mounts. Route it through the cable-

routing hole and connect the other end to the motorcycle frame (see Figure 5-14). 4.

W A R N I N G DO NOT connect the ground strap directly to the negative battery post. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Transceiver and Cabling Installation 5-21 5. The diagram of the shock mount is shown loosely assembled. After the hex screws are tightened, the rubber washers are compressed to fasten the weather- resistant enclosure securely to the universal mounting plate. 6. Figure 5-16 is an exploded view of the enclosure; it shows details that will help to understand how the enclosure is mounted. After the enclosure is completely mounted, check for proper ground connectioncontinuity between the antenna ground plane and the motorcycle frame. 5.11 Transceiver and Cabling Installation After the weather-resistant enclosure has been installed, the radio chassis (transceiver) is installed in the enclosure and then appropriate cables are connected. However, before the transceiver can be installed, the cabling must be properly positioned in the enclosure. 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure Position the cabling in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows:

1. Run the speaker, power, control-head, and ignition sense cables into the enclosure. 2. Lay the excess cable length between the radio mounting bosses in an S configuration as shown in Figure 5-15. Do not coil any excess cable. Use the supplied tie wraps to bundle cable as shown. NOTE: If the extra cable length is not sufficient to match the illustrated cable routing, then match the illustration as closely as possible. 3. Connect the speaker cable to the accessory cable connector. NOTE: The accessory-cable emergency connector is shipped with a shorting plug installed. The headset connector is also shipped with a shorting plug installed. The plugs must remain in if an emergency switch and/or headset is not used. If an emergency switch and/or headset is used, remove the shorting plug(s) and discard. Install the mounting plate in position on top of the cables installed above. Take care not to damage or pinch the cables when securing the mounting plate in position. 4. NOTE: At this point, the control-head cable plug should be located at the forward end of the enclosure, and the power-cable, speaker-cable, and accessory-cable plugs should be located at the rear of the enclosure. 6878215A01 5-22 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Transceiver and Cabling Installation ACCESSORY CABLE EMERGENCY AND EXTERNAL ALARM CONNETOR TRANSCEIVER POWER CABLE ACCESSORY CABLE CONTROL CABLE

(CAN) ACCESSORY CABLE HEADSET CONNECTOR HEADSET SPORTING PLUG EMERGENCY CABLE SHORTING PLUG IGNITION SENSE

(ACC) CONTROL HEAD GROUND (BLACK) CONTROL HEAD POWER (RED) CONTROL HEAD POWER FUSE Figure 5-15. Installing Cables 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows (see Figure 5-16). NOTE: For new or existing installations, use only the APX 7500 trunnion (kit number: HLN7002_). Install the mounting trunnion and loose ends of the four ground straps to the radio-mounting plate, using four screws, flat washers, and external-tooth lock washers (see Figure 5-16). The ground straps must be sandwiched between the flat washers and lock washers. The lock washer must be against the trunnion. The flat washer must be under the screw head. 1. 2. Attach the transceiver to the mounting trunnion and secure with the two screws provided. 3. Connect the control cable to the front of the transceiver. Ensure the control-cable connector screws are tightened. 4. Attach the accessory connector to the transceiver. Plug in the power connector. 5. Install the grommet around the cables and push the grommet into the cable-routing hole of the weather-resistant enclosure. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Transceiver and Cabling Installation 5-23 15 3 2 18 17 16 4 1 2 8 9 6 7 10 13 12 14 11 6 Figure 5-16. Installing the Transceiver Table 5-1. Transceiver Installation Parts List Item No. Description Item No. Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lock washer Flat washer (8 used) Screw Screw Grommet Screw Lock catch Radio mounting plate Bottom housing 6878215A01 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Ground shield plane Top cover Gasket Hinge Enclosure mounts Transceiver Screw Trunnion External tooth lock washer (8 used) 5-24 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Emergency Switch Option 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option Use the two-conductor, green/black cable which has as one end terminated with two contacts (part number 3080221P02) and which is supplied with this W688 Motorcycle Emergency Push Button. Disconnect the emergency switch shorting plug from the accessory cable. Replace the shorting wire of the shorting plug with the terminated end of the green/black emergency cable. Reconnect the plug to the accessory cable. 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option The motorcycle radio is offered with only one optional relay connection. If both horn and lights are required, wire a second relay coil parallel to the first relay. Use the two-conductor green/black cable which has one end terminated with two contacts (part number 3080221P02) and which is supplied with this W116 Motorcycle Alarm Relay Option. Insert the contacts into positions 3 and 4 of the emergency shorting plug of the accessory cable. Refer to Figure 5-22. 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory A six-position connector on the accessory cable has been made available for connecting a headset accessory. Headset manufacturers should be consulted for compatibility with the motorcycle radio prior to purchase and installation of the headset. To install, disconnect the headset shorting plug. Remove the headset shorting wire from the headset shorting plug. Terminate the contacts provided to the applicable wires of the headset cable. Insert the terminated wires into the headset shorting plug per the contact positions illustrated in the typical headset schematic found in this manual. Reconnect the terminated headset shorting plug to the accessory cable. When upgrading from an APX 7500 radio, the existing headset cable HLN6890 requires these two pins to be swapped (see Figure 5-17). The other motorcycle headset cable with this pin change is 3080010R04. 20 13 26 7 Remove from Pin 1

(VI P OU T 1 ) Insert into Pin 22

(Monitor) J2, BACK OF RADIO 21 14 8 1 Rework for Handlebar HUB operation when upgrading existing cable HLN6890. SPK +

GND AUX_PTT 1 3 5

(Female-Pins) 2 4 6 SPK -

VIP OUT 1 AUX_MIC Figure 5-17. Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Control Head Sunshield 5-25 5.15 Installing the Control Head Sunshield Install the sunshield (part number NNTN7279_) to the control head as follows. 1. Assemble the sunshield to the remote mount trunnion as shown in Figure 5-18. The same process can be used for the motorcycle trunnion. Figure 5-18. Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield 2. Position the sunshield as shown in Figure 5-19 and remove the Velcro adhesive backing. Velcro Adhesive Backing Figure 5-19. Position the Sunshield 6878215A01 5-26 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Installing the Control Head Sunshield 3. Slide the control head onto the trunnion while aligning the edge of the control head with the edge of the sunshield as shown in Figure 5-20. Make sure the Velcro properly adheres to the control head. Figure 5-20. Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion 4. Position control head as desired and install screws as shown in Figure 5-21. Figure 5-21. Position Control Head as Desired 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation: Horn/Lights Wiring 5-27 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring Figure 5-22. Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram Figure 5-23. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram

W A R N I N G Motorcycle products must have pins 1 and 2 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by REMOVING the emergency shorting plug, or pressing the emergency switch, will turn on the radio. Failure to maintain a normally-closed path could drain the vehicle battery if left unchecked. EMERGENCY-equipped radios are capable of TRANSMITTING without warning. 6878215A01 5-28 Motorcycle Radio Installation Notes 6878215A01